JP2012139537A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To achieve a balance between a player's interest in a read-ahead notice and his/her interest in present variable display by preventing a decrease in his/her interest in the result of display of present varying identification information, and to suppress excessive speculativeness.SOLUTION: In a low-base state, first read-ahead processing (S219) is executed for the execution of a read-ahead notice based on reserved memory information of a first reserved memory buffer, while the execution of second read-ahead processing (S230) is inhibited for the inhibition of a read-ahead notice based on reserved memory information of a second reserved memory buffer. On the contrary, in a high-base state, the execution of the first read-ahead processing (S219) is inhibited for inhibition of the read-ahead notice based on the reserved memory information of the first reserved memory buffer, while the second read-ahead processing (S230) is executed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, and the like, and more specifically, a game is performed by driving a gaming medium into a gaming area where the gaming medium can flow down, First variable display means for performing variable display of identification information each identifiable based on having passed through one start area and deriving and displaying the display result, and on the basis that the game medium has passed through the second start area Second variable display means for executing variable display of identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result, and a specific display in which the display result derived and displayed on the first or second variable display means is predetermined. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls a gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a result is obtained.

  What is generally known as this type of gaming machine is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, after the first execution condition of variable display is established by passing the first starting area of the game medium, A first variable display unit for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) on the basis of establishment of a first start condition of variable display that allows start (a state in which fluctuations can be started) (For example, an image display device) and after the second execution condition for variable display is satisfied by passage of the game medium through the second start area, the second start condition for variable display that allows the start of variable display is satisfied. A second variable display unit for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information is provided, and the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the first or second variable display unit is predetermined. Specific display results ( When a per symbol), there is one that controls the advantageous specific gaming state (jackpot state) for the player.

  The above-mentioned specific display result includes a special display result (probability variation pattern) determined so that the occurrence probability of the specific gaming state is improved. After the game state is generated and finished, the probability change state (probability change state) in which the occurrence probability of the specific game state is improved is controlled.

  As such a gaming machine, a random number is extracted when the game medium passes to the first or second starting area, and it is determined whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result, and the extracted random number or the like is determined as a specific game state. In some cases, the information is stored on hold as information for specifying whether or not to control, and a specific game state is notified based on the determination that a specific display result is obtained (for example, Patent Document 1).

  As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by prefetching a random number corresponding to the reserved storage and pre-notifying both the passage of the game medium to the first start area and the passage of the game medium to the second start area. It was going.

JP 2006-14850 A

  However, in this conventional gaming machine, there is a disadvantage that the gambling joy is greatly increased.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing excessive gambling.

(1) Based on the fact that a game is played by driving the game medium into a game area (game area 7) where the game medium can flow down, and the game medium has passed through the first start area (first start winning award 13). The first variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, effect display device 9) for performing variable display of the identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result, and the game medium are in the second start area (second 2nd variable display means (second special symbol display device 9a, effect display device 9) that performs variable display of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that it has passed through the 2 start winning opening 14) and derives and displays the display result. ), And when the display result derived and displayed on the first or second variable display means becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), the game state is determined to be a specific game state advantageous to the player ( Big hit) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1),
Information (value extracted from random R, hit determination result) for specifying whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the gaming medium passes through the first starting area is within a predetermined upper limit number range. First hold storage means (S215 in FIG. 17) that can be stored as hold storage information at
Information (value extracted from random R, hit determination result) for specifying whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the gaming medium passes through the second starting area is within a predetermined upper limit number range. And second hold storage means (S226 in FIG. 17) that can be stored as hold storage information.
Based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means when the specific game state is not controlled and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the first variable display means When the variable display of the first variable display means is executed, the control state is not controlled to the specific gaming state, and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the second variable display means, the second reserved storage Variable display control execution means (S300 to S304 in FIG. 16, S800 to S803 in FIG. 58) for executing variable display of the second variable display means based on the stored storage information stored in the means;
Based on the establishment of the special condition, special gaming state control means (FIG. 8A, S61, S71, S71, S71, etc.) that controls the gaming state to a special gaming state (probability change) that is likely to result in the specific display result compared to the normal gaming state. S158, S161, S162),
When on-hold storage information indicating that control is to be performed in the specific gaming state is stored in the first on-hold storage means, a display result based on the on-hold storage information is displayed before the start of variable display based on the on-hold storage information. Based on the reserved storage information when the reserved storage information indicating that the specific display result is to be executed and the control to the specific gaming state is performed is stored in the second reserved storage means Prior to the start of variable display, notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect for notifying that the display result based on the hold storage information becomes the specific display result (S675 to S685 in FIG. 57, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 68),
In the special game state, execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the hold memory information stored in the first hold memory means is prohibited, and in the normal game state, the notice effect is stored in the second hold memory means. The notice prohibition means for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect by the notice effect executing means based on the stored storage information (S218b and S229b in FIG. 71 as establishment of a predetermined condition for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect) is provided. .

  According to such a configuration, in the special gaming state, execution of the notice effect by the notice effect executing means based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means is prohibited, and in the normal game state, the second hold storage means. Execution of the notice effect by the notice effect executing means based on the stored stored information is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that gambling is excessively increased.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), when the hold storage information is stored in the first and second hold storage means, the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means The variable display of the second variable display means based on the hold storage information stored in the second hold storage means is executed in preference to the variable display of the first variable display means (FIG. 19A, S52, S54),
A variable winning device (variable) that is provided in the game area and can change between a first state in which the game medium does not enter or hardly enter the second start area and a second state in which the game medium easily enters the second start area. Winning ball apparatus 15),
State switching means (S1225, S1245 to S1247, for controlling the variable winning device to either the high base state, which is a control state that is likely to be in the second state, or the low base state, which is a control state that is unlikely to be the second state) 37)
The notice prohibition means prohibits execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means in the high base state (a state in which execution of the notice effect is prohibited) (S218a and S229a in FIG. 17).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects are exhibited. For example, the variable display based on the hold storage information stored in the second hold storage means is preferentially established, and the hold storage stored in both the storage means of the first hold storage means and the second hold storage means is prefetched. In the case of performing the notice effect, the pre-read notice effect based on the hold storage information of the first hold storage means is executed when the game based on the hold storage information of the second hold storage means is preferentially executed during the high base. As a result, a variable display game is possible using the hold memory of the second hold memory means while the specific game state is fixed in the hold memory of the first hold memory means. Is in a state of giving notice of continuous occurrence (continuous change). As a result, there arises a disadvantage that euphoria is remarkably increased.

  In order to prevent such inconvenience, the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means is prohibited, so that a specific gaming state is continuously generated (continuous change). The state to alert | report can be avoided and it becomes possible to suppress the improvement of excessive euphoria.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1), special gaming state control means (S161) for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more likely to result in the specific display than the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition. )
The notice prohibition means is:
In the normal game state, execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means is not prohibited, and the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means in the special game state. (S218c in FIG. 72 is established as the establishment of a predetermined condition that prohibits execution of the notice effect).

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, there is a low possibility that a plurality of pieces of the specific gaming state will be generated in the holding storage information of the first holding storage unit and the second holding storage unit. In such a case, even if the notice effect is performed by the notice effect executing means based on the hold storage information stored in the first and second hold storage means, there are a plurality of items in the reserved memory information that are in the specific gaming state. While the possibility of occurrence is low, the notice effect is hardly executed by prohibiting the notice effect execution by the notice effect executing means. Therefore, in the normal game state, the notice effect is hardly executed by preventing the notice effect from being executed by the notice effect executing means. Further, in a special game state in which a plurality of specific game states are likely to occur in the hold memory information, execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory information of the first hold memory means is prohibited, and the hold memory information It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of notifying the occurrence of a plurality of specific gaming states and the continuous occurrence of specific gaming states (continuous change), and to suppress excessive improvement in gambling.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the notice prohibition unit is configured such that the notice effect execution unit includes the hold storage information stored in the first or second hold storage unit. When a notice effect that notifies that the display result becomes the specific display result is executed based on the variable display executed after the variable display that executed the notice effect, the notice effect is prohibited from being executed. There was provided a backward notice effect prohibiting means (YES in S218 or S229 in FIG. 17, YES in S661 in FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, in spite of the fact that the notice effect for notifying that the specific display result is obtained has already been executed, the notice effect is provided in the variable display executed after the variable display in which the notice effect is executed. The occurrence of inconveniences that drastically increase the player's gambling ambition by executing them in duplicate, and the occurrence of inconveniences that confuse the player due to multiple reserved memory information to be notified be able to.

  (5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the backward notice effect prohibition unit cancels the prohibition of the execution of the notice effect based on the end of the specific gaming state (prefetching big hit in S449a in FIG. 28). The flag is reset, and the prefetch small hit flag is reset in S309 of FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, when the specific gaming state ends, the prohibition of execution of the notice effect is canceled, and the player who desires to execute the notice effect can be made to be able to execute the notice effect again. Can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine of any of (1) to (5) above, as variable display pattern selection means for selecting a variable display pattern to be executed,
First stage pattern selection means (S101 in FIG. 22) for selecting the type of the variable display pattern from a plurality of types;
Second stage pattern selection means (S105 in FIG. 22) for selecting a variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns belonging to the type selected by the first stage pattern selection means.

  According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern selection means includes the first stage pattern selection means and the second stage pattern selection means, for example, without changing the distribution in the first stage pattern selection means, Since the design change for changing the setting for selecting the variable display pattern is possible only by changing the distribution in the two-step pattern selection means, the design change of the variable display pattern can be facilitated.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6), the notice effect execution means performs the variable display during execution of variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means. It is possible to execute a normal notice effect for notifying that the display result that is derived and displayed is the specific display result (FIGS. 47 and 48, S676, S677, S681, and S682 in FIG. 63).
A notice effect mode selection means (S676 and S677 in FIG. 63) for selecting a notice effect mode to be used for a notice including the notice effect and the normal notice effect from a plurality of predetermined types,
The notice effect mode selection means is:
A first stage effect mode selection means (S676 in FIG. 63) for selecting one type from a plurality of types in which the plurality of types of notice effect modes are classified into a plurality of types;
Second stage effect mode selection means (S677 in FIG. 63) for selecting a notice effect mode from a plurality of types of the notice effect modes belonging to the type selected by the first stage effect mode selection means.

  According to such a configuration, the notice effect mode selection means includes the first stage effect mode selection means and the second stage effect mode selection means, and therefore, for example, the distribution in the first stage effect mode selection means is not changed. In addition, since the design change for changing the setting for selecting the notice effect form can be performed only by changing the distribution in the second stage effect form selection means, the design change of the notice effect form can be facilitated. .

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the open | release aspect of the big winning opening in the hit game according to the hit type. It is a timing chart showing the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game of each of the big hit types "16R probability variation A", "16R probability variation B", "16R probability variation C". It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating specifically a start winning designation | designated command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st prefetch process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a round start pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the open pattern of the change time of a normal symbol, and a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows pending storage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of an effect side holding | maintenance memory | storage specific information storage area (effect side holding | maintenance specific area). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of a variable display of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus when the prefetch notice effect is performed as an example of a notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus when a normal notice effect is performed as an example of a notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus when a normal notice effect is performed as an example of a notice effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of background image displayed when a notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final stop symbol determination table at the time of non-reach deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final stop symbol determination table at the time of reach | missing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final stop symbol determination table at the time of big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a display operation in case a fluctuation display result turns into "16R probability variation big hit". It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of pseudo | simulation continuous execution. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a timing chart for explaining the case where the change display is performed by the normal change (non-reach) and the case where the normal change (non-reach) is changed to the pseudo-change pattern. It is a flowchart which shows a notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows other embodiment of a start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows other embodiment by the start opening switch passage process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notice aspect of a hold display.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine. After the execution condition is satisfied, the display result is displayed after a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed in one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the satisfaction of the variable display start condition that allows the start of variable display. A gaming machine that includes a variation display unit for derivation display, and that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variation display unit is a predetermined specific display result. If it is.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. An outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing a variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device (variable display unit) that performs variable display of effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable. In the effect symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decoration (effect) identification information of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, but the position of the symbol display area 9A is not fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Alternatively, the three areas of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the lower part of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small indicator is formed in, for example, a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition (that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13) or the second start condition (the game ball is the first one) that is the variable display execution condition. 2 is established, the variable display start condition (for example, when the variable display due to the stored memory that has been won first and is not ended) is established. The display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. In other words, the variable display execution condition is satisfied when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. In addition, the variable display start condition is satisfied when the variable display due to the hold memory which is not in the big hit game and is won first is ended. The data related to the variable display in which the execution condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as hold storage data until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later.

  In other words, the first special symbol display 8a performs variable display of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area (first start winning opening 13) and displays the display result. Is derived and displayed. The second special symbol display 9a performs variable display of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second start area (second start winning port 14), and displays and displays the display result. . Then, when the game medium passes through the first start area (the first start winning opening 13) while the variable display of the identification information is being executed in the first special symbol display 8a, the specific game state (big hit state) is controlled. Is stored as reserved storage information within a range of a predetermined upper limit number. Further, when the game medium passes through the second start area (second start winning opening 14) during execution of variable display of the identification information on the second special symbol display 9a, the game state is controlled to the specific game state (big hit state). Is stored as reserved storage information within a range of a predetermined upper limit number.

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation).

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the time of the first special symbol change display time by the first special symbol display 8a, the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is displayed in a variable manner. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display unit 8b, during the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  In addition, a 1st decorative design and a 2nd decorative design may be named generically. Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the fluctuation display of the first decoration symbol on the first decoration symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the second decorative symbol on the second decoration symbol display 9b are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. It has been. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14 (it is easy to start winning), and is in a state advantageous to the player (first state). In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. Further, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state is a disadvantageous state (second state) for the player, and the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. As will be described later, in the high base state, the winning rate of the second start winning opening 14 is high. In that case, the winning rate of the second starting winning port 14 is higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning port 13. Therefore, the ratio (base) of the number of prize game balls to be paid out with respect to the predetermined number of game balls put into the game area 6 is high. That is, it is a high base state. In general, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls by winning a prize to the number of shot balls is called “base”. For example, when there are 40 payout balls with respect to 100 shot balls, the base is 40 (%).

  Specifically, in the high base state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. When the winning is determined for the normal symbol, as described above, the display result (stop symbol) of the normal symbol is displayed as the winning symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (opening time). It becomes a state and a base goes up. Further, instead of increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, or in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the variable winning ball apparatus The number of times or the opening time of 15 may be increased, or the number of times and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 described later, in the high base state, control is performed so that the number of times and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased compared to the low base state. In this embodiment, the base is also increased by controlling the number of times and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to increase. Further, instead of increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, or in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the normal symbol indicator It may be made to be in the high base state by controlling the ten variable display times to the short state when making it shorter than the low base state. Compared to the normal gaming state, the time-short state is variable during a certain period of time because the normal symbol's reserved memory is promoted based on the fact that the normal symbol's variable display time is shortened compared to the non-time-short state. The frequency at which the winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, in the short-time state, winning to the second start winning opening 14 is likely to occur, so the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball corresponding to the winning with respect to the number of gaming balls hit into the gaming area 7 However, there are more compared to the normal gaming state. Further, as the high base state, the control for increasing the number of times or the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the control for increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, and the normal symbol display 10 You may make it be in a high base state by performing control which combined any one of these control which shortens fluctuation time, any two, or all these three.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is made to recall the jackpot. The combination of effect symbols as a specific display result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a star-shaped movable member 84 that rotates is provided on the upper side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9. The movable member 84 is a member that is provided at a position that is visible to the player, such as a decorative portion around the effect display device 9, and that operates according to a predetermined effect such as a movable member notice described later. More specifically, the movable member 84 is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 88 and is driven and rotates as the motor 88 rotates. The movable member 84 is operated when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, such as when a pseudo-series effect is executed.

  On the right side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are executed in association with a re-variation effect of a pseudo-series (to be described later) (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period). Blinks when an effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-ream), the greater the reliability that is a big hit (the difference from the case of a big hit) The ratio of the ratio selected when the jackpot is large and the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability of the jackpot) are increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the present embodiment, an example in which reach may not occur even when variation display based on a variation pattern of pseudo-continuous is executed (see the one-time pseudo-ream (non-reach) in FIG. 12A) will be described. However, the reach may be established in the final re-variation whenever the variation display by the pseudo-variation variation pattern is executed. Furthermore, the generation ratio of the effect may be changed depending on the number of re-variation repeated executions (the number of changes in the pseudo-continuous). For example, when the number of re-variation executions reaches 3 (a pseudo-series that varies four times when the initial variation is included), “reach determination” or “super reach determination” may be used. Further, when the number of executions of re-variation reaches a predetermined number, it may be “big hit fixed”.

  In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. In addition, even when the symbol variation time is shortened (a gaming state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened) although not in the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a central position on the front side of the top surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a displays the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays the variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner. That is, the change display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, effect control means (effect control microcomputer 100 described later) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. When the command is received, the display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b for displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and the display control of the effect display device 9 for displaying the dynamic symbols in a variable manner are performed. In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 and performs various effects such as a notice effect described later according to the signal.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  An operation signal from the operation button 30 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 107. As will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect such as a notice effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 30.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 88 to operate the movable member 84 via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then performs step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S). ) The main process after 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (S4), the RAM 55 is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process).

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as a command at the time of power supply recovery to the effect control board 80 (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (S13). For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the production display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14).

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (S15). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, A switch process for determining these states is executed (S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Also, a determination random number update process is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control (S23). The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an effect control command control process for sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (S30). Specifically, the CPU 56 pays out in response to a winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. An output process for outputting the contents to the output port is executed (S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
Triggered by the start prize, the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b starts to display a special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) for a predetermined time (variation time). ), The stop symbol which is the result of the special symbol variation display is stopped (displayed). If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is decided to make a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled.

  In this embodiment, eight types of numbers “1” to “8” are set as special symbols. Among the special symbols “1” to “8”, “1” is the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, “2” is the 16R probability variation B big hit symbol, “3” is the 16R probability variation C big hit symbol, “4” is In the 15R probability variable big hit symbol, “5” is set for the 15R non-probable big hit symbol, “6” is set for the 2R probability variable big hit symbol, “7” is set for the small hit symbol, and “8” is set for the off symbol. “R” indicates a round. Therefore, for example, 16R indicates that the number of rounds is 16.

  When the 15R jackpot symbol ("4", "5") is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, the opening / closing plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is predetermined. A unit round in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state which is advantageous to the player in an open state for a period (for example, 29 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings occurs. Is started. In the 15R big hit state, the number of rounds is 15.

  When the 16R jackpot symbol ("1" to "3") is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, the variable winning ball apparatus according to the type of jackpot symbol The open / close plate at 20 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings occurs, and the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is advantageous for the player. A unit round in which the operation of changing to one state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) is started. In the 16R big hit state, as will be described later, the number of times the opening / closing plate is opened in one round is set differently according to the type of the big hit symbol. In the 16R big hit state, the number of rounds is 16.

  Further, when the symbol (“6”) for 2R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state (2R big hit state) in which the number of rounds is two. In the 2R big hit state, the opening time of the open / close plate in each round is shorter (for example, 0.5 seconds) than in the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol is shortened as compared with the normal state (the state which is not the probability variation state or the short time state). In the short-time state, for example, either a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special symbol variation display is executed and the variation display result is “big hit”, either condition is satisfied first. When it ends. In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state.

  When it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability changing state, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result.

  Even after the 2R big hit state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). The probability variation state that is controlled after the 2R big hit state ends is also referred to as a sudden probability variation (surprise) state.

  When the small hit symbol ("7") is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, the gaming state is controlled to a small hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state. The In the small hit gaming state, as in the 2R big hit state, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the big winning opening is opened. The number of times of opening is two. However, unlike the 2R big hit state, the gaming state is not changed. That is, the gaming state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state continues.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining a big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of predetermined jackpot determination values is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the start winning opening 13 is easily opened, and the start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of predetermined determination values per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of opening and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may increase. Even in the short-time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time. In this embodiment, in the probability variation state, in addition to an increase in the probability that the big symbol is determined, an example in which the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased is shown. However, in the probability variation state, it is sufficient that at least the probability of being determined as a big hit is high.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in response to the special symbol change display by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 9, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the variation of the effect symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. For example, the stop symbols of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, or “left”, “middle”, and “right” The stop symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  The period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R (variable display period = variable time) Thus, the variation display state of the effect symbol may become a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display state in which the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect).

  In addition, during the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, it is possible that the variation display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and that the variation display result may be a big hit symbol. There may be a case where an effect for notifying the player is given in accordance with a variation display mode of the symbol. In this embodiment, effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” can be executed.

  In the “slip” effect, the effect symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the symbol display areas (for example, “1” or “2”) are displayed. For example, after changing the effect symbol again in one or both of the “left” symbol display area 9L and the “right” symbol display area 9R, in the present embodiment the “right” symbol display area 9R) By making the stop display, the effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In addition, by notifying the player that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not finalized (final stop), such as by displaying fluctuation fluctuation in the temporary stop display, or by changing the effect symbol again after a short temporary stop. Is preferred. In addition, the effect design may be re-variable after the effect design is temporarily stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the stop-displayed effect design has been confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” effect, the effect symbol is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R based on the fact that the start condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied once. After the change (initial change), the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then the effect symbols are changed (re-variable) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R again. The effect display to be performed is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times).

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo consecutive chances. In the “pseudo-continuous” effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. A production symbol constituting either one is temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination. In this way, by temporarily stopping the quasi-ream chance, it is possible to appeal the occurrence (continuation) of the quasi-ream to the player.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “non-reach loss” (also referred to as “normal shift” or “normal variation”) when the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. Depending on the reach state, after a reach effect is executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Then, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed.

  When the small special symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 has the variation display mode of the effect symbol “surprising”. After the effect symbols are displayed in the same manner as in some cases, a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match). In some cases, a stop symbol that is displayed as a stop or a stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “2”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. Random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.

  Random 2-1 is a random counter for determining the type of big hit (16R positive variation A big hit, 16R positive variation B big hit, 16R positive variation C big hit, 15R positive variation big hit, 15R non-probable big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit). . Random 2-1 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec, updated from 0 and updated up to 9 which is the upper limit, and then updated again from 0.

  Random 2-2 is a reach determination random counter that determines whether or not to reach. Random 2-2 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remaining time of interrupt processing, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated up to the upper limit of 239, and then is added and updated again from 0.

  Random 3 is a random counter for determining the variation pattern type that determines the type (classification) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remainder of the interrupt process, and is incremented and updated from 0 to 241 which is the upper limit thereof, and then incremented and updated again from 0.

  Random 4 is a random counter for determining a variation pattern that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remainder of the interrupt process, and is added and updated from 0 and updated up to 251 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0.

  Random 5 is a random counter for normal symbol hit determination that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remaining interrupt processing time, and is updated from 3 and updated up to 13 which is the upper limit, and then is updated again from 0.

  Random 6 is a random counter for determining an initial value of random 5 for determining an initial value of random 5. Random 6 is incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remainder of the interrupt process, updated from 3 and updated up to 13 which is the upper limit, and then updated again from 0.

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a (2-1) big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol per determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. Further, in this embodiment, hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) may be generated as a random number for determination as a random R value. Use random numbers.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a table used when the hit determination is performed. FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure jackpot type determination table. FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure jackpot type determination table. The table shown in FIG. 8 is stored in the ROM 54. The tables shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B are tables in which determination values to be compared with random R are set.

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 8A includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability-change jackpot determination table used in a probability variation state. In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set as the big hit determination value, and in the probability change big hit determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A). Each numerical value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination is performed by determining whether or not the value extracted from the random R matches the jackpot determination value set according to the gaming state. When it is determined that the two match, the game is controlled to one of the big hit gaming states among the 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R probability variation C, 15R probability variation, 15R non-probability variation, and 2R probability variation.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a larger number of jackpot determination values is set when the probability is changing than when normal. When the value extracted from the random R is “1020 to 1080” or “13320 to 13477”, it is determined that it is a big hit regardless of whether or not it is a probability change time. The determination value within the range of “1020 to 1080” or “13320 to 13477” is a common jackpot determination value regardless of the probability state.

  The small hit determination table shown in FIG. 8B includes a first special figure determination table used for the small special hit determination for the first special symbol and a second special bonus used for the small special hit determination for the second special symbol. There is a figure determination table. In the first special figure determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8B is set as a small hit determination value, and in the second special figure determination table, FIG. Each numerical value described in the right column is set as a small hit judgment value. The small hit determination is performed by determining whether or not the value extracted from the random R matches the small hit determination value set according to the gaming state. When it is determined that they match, the small hit gaming state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 8B, the number of small hit determination values is set more for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol.

  The numerical values described in FIGS. 8A and 8B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value corresponding to the value of the random R may be collectively expressed as a “hit determination value”. Further, the big hit determination and the small hit determination corresponding to the value of the random R may be collectively expressed as “hit determination”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as a random R value. The random R value is one of those shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit or a small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B indicate the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit, respectively. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure jackpot type determination table. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table is a jackpot based on a random number (random 2-1) for determining the big hit type when it is determined that the variation display result of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol. A table that is referred to in order to determine one of “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, “16R probability variation C”, “15R probability variation”, “15R non-variability variation”, and “2R probability variation”. It is. The first special figure jackpot type determination table is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2-1, which is “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, “16R probability variation C”, “15R probability variation”, Determination values (big hit type determination values) corresponding to “15R uncertain change” and “2R probability change” are set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure jackpot type determination table. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table is a jackpot based on a random number (random 2-1) for determining the big hit type when it is determined that the variation display result of the second special symbol is a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, “16R probability variation C”, “15R probability variation”, and “15R uncertain variation”. The second special figure jackpot type determination table is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2-1, which is “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, “16R probability variation C”, “15R probability variation”, A determination value (big hit type determination value) corresponding to each of “15R uncertain change” is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In the second special figure jackpot type determination table, among the big hit types, “2R probability variation” is not allocated, but the number of determination values of “15R probability variation” is larger than that of the first special figure jackpot type determination table. Many are set. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table, the number of determination values of “16R probability variation A” is set larger than that in the first special figure jackpot type determination table. As will be described later, the 2R probability variation big hit and small hit are hits where a prize ball is not substantially obtained because the opening and closing plate opening time is set to be extremely short. Therefore, during the time savings, the number of winnings at the second start winning opening 14 is increased, but the rate of occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit and small hit is reduced, and the rate of occurrence of 16R probability variation A big hit is improved. For this reason, for example, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player when the probabilistic big hits continue, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the ratio at which the “probable change” jackpot type is selected for the first special symbol and the ratio at which the “probable” jackpot type is selected for the second special symbol are set to be equal.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an opening mode of the special winning opening during the winning game according to the winning type. FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing the number of rounds and the release mode according to the jackpot type. FIG. 9B is an explanatory diagram showing the number of times of opening and the manner of opening according to the small hits. The table shown in FIG. 9 is stored in the ROM 54.

  Referring to FIG. 9A, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation A”, as a one-round opening mode, the big winning opening is once closed for 5 seconds or by a predetermined number of winnings, and then again. The opening operation is repeated three times. When the big hit type is “16R probability variation B”, as an opening mode of one round, the operation of opening once again after the big winning opening is opened for 5 seconds or by winning a predetermined number is repeated twice. When the big hit type is “16R probability variation C”, as a one-round opening mode, the big winning opening is closed for 5 seconds or when a predetermined number of winnings are won, and the game ends. In the 16R jackpot gaming state, one round of release according to the jackpot type is repeated 16 rounds, that is, 16 times.

  Also, when the big hit type is “15R probability change” or “15R non-change probability”, as a one-round opening mode, the big prize opening is closed for 29 seconds or by winning a predetermined number. In the 15R jackpot gaming state, the opening mode of one round is repeated 15 rounds, that is, 15 times.

  When the big hit type is “2R probability change”, as a one-round opening mode, the big winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds and then closed. In the 2R jackpot gaming state, one round of release mode is repeated two rounds, that is, twice.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9 (B), when the winning type is “small hit”, as in the case of “2R probability variation”, as the opening mode at the time of opening once, the big prize opening is 0. After 5 seconds open, close and finish. In the small hit gaming state, the opening mode at the time of opening once is repeated twice.

  Here, when the opening mode of “small hit” and “2R probability change” is compared, when “small hit” is achieved, it is substantially the same as when “2R probability change”. A hit game is performed in a manner. For this reason, the player cannot specify whether it was a small hit or a 2R probability change from the release mode of the hit game. As a result, even when a hit game is played with a small hit, it is possible to give the player the impression that a 2R probability change has occurred. That is, the small hit can be used as a so-called false hit of 2R probability change. In addition, “small hit” cannot be distinguished from “2R probability change” or “small hit” from the open state of the big prize opening. For this reason, it is possible to create a state (a so-called hidden probability variation state) in which it is not possible to specify whether or not the probability change has occurred from the opening mode of the winning game. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Since the 2R probability change does not occur in the second special symbol display device 8b (see FIG. 8D), the second special symbol display device 8b may be controlled so that no small hit occurs.

  The probability of such “small hit” is set so that the first special symbol side is higher than the second special symbol side as shown in FIG. 8B. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8 (C) and 8 (D), “2R probability variation” is selected on the first special symbol side as the type of jackpot, corresponding to the probability of “small hit”. On the other hand, “2R probability change” is set not to be selected on the second special symbol side. That is, the probability of “2R probability variation” is set to be higher on the first special symbol side than on the second special symbol side. For example, if the probability of “small hit” on the second special symbol side that has a low probability of “2R probability variation” is set to the same level as that on the first special symbol side, the second special symbol side is opened twice. Since the percentage of hit types that are hits is “small hits” increases and the player is expected to be “small hits”, it becomes difficult to create the hidden probability change state as described above. There is a risk that it will be less interesting. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to be expected to be “small hit” and to make it easy to create the hidden probability variation state as described above, on the second special symbol side, “2R The probability of “probability” is set to be reduced, and the probability of “small hit” is also set to be low.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game of each of the big hit types “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, and “16R probability variation C” will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game of each of the big hit types “16R probability variation A”, “16R probability variation B”, and “16R probability variation C”.

  FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation A”. As shown in FIG. 10 (A), during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation A”, after the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time, the operation of closing once is repeated three times to complete one round. The operation of the special winning opening is repeated 16 times. Therefore, during the big hit game of “16R probability variation A”, the big winning opening is opened 3 × 16 = 48 times.

  FIG. 10B is a timing chart showing the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation B”. As shown in FIG. 10B, during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation B”, after the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time, the operation of closing once is repeated twice to complete one round. The operation of the special winning opening is repeated 16 times. Therefore, during the big hit game of “16R probability variation B”, the big winning opening is opened 2 × 16 = 32 times.

  FIG. 10C is a timing chart showing the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation C”. As shown in FIG. 10 (C), during the big hit game with the big hit type of “16R probability variation C”, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time and then closed to finish one round. The operation is repeated 16 times. Therefore, during the big hit game of “16R probability variation C”, the big winning opening is opened 1 × 16 = 16 times.

  From the above, among the types of 16R jackpots, “16R probability variation A” can be said to be the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage for the player, and “16R probability variation B” and “16R probability variation C” are less advantageous to the player in this order. It can be said. Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot that is controlled by the jackpot game, which has the same number of rounds but is different in the release mode and has a different degree of advantage for the player, is referred to as a chance bonus (CB).

  As shown in FIG. 10, until the timing A when the 16R probability variation C big hit ends, it is impossible to specify which type of 16R probability variation big hit is controlled from the opening mode of the big prize opening. Similarly, until the timing B when the 16R probability variation B big hit ends, it cannot be specified whether the 16R probability variation A big hit is controlled or the 16R probability variation B big hit is controlled based on the opening manner of the big prize opening. Therefore, on the player side, it is possible to specify that the 16R probability variation A or the 16R probability variation B is controlled by the big hit by exceeding the timing A, and the timing is controlled to the big hit of the 16R probability variation A by exceeding the timing B. Can be identified. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression that the jackpot is developed with a certain timing as a criterion, and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach determination table used when a reach determination is made as to whether or not a reach is to be generated when it is determined that the hit is determined by the hit determination. Note that determining whether or not there is a reach using the reach determination table and the value extracted from the random 2-2 is referred to as reach determination.

  The table shown in FIG. 11 is stored in the ROM 54. The table shown in FIG. 11 is a table in which determination values to be compared with random 2-2 are set. In the present embodiment, as the determination value used for reach determination, a different determination value is set according to the number of reserved memories when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  When the number of reserved memories is “0 to 2” and the value extracted from random 2-2 is “1 to 30”, it is determined that there is reach, and when it is “31 to 239”, it is determined that there is no reach. Is done.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 5” and the value extracted from random 2-2 is “1 to 25”, it is determined that there is a reach, and when it is “26 to 239”, it is determined that there is no reach. Is done.

  When the reserved storage number is “6 to 8” and the value extracted from the random 2-2 is “1 to 20”, it is determined that there is a reach, and when it is “21 to 239”, it is determined that there is no reach. Is done.

  As described above, the greater the number of reserved memories when the variable display start condition is satisfied, the lower the probability of reaching in the variable display, and the smaller the number of reserved memories, the probability of reaching in the variable display. The determination value of the reach determination table is set so as to increase. As a result, the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is large can be shortened, and the occurrence of invalid start that is not reserved and stored because the number of reserved memories is the upper limit can be reduced.

  It should be noted that among the reach determination values, the determination values of “1 to 20” are common reach determination values that are always determined to be reach regardless of the number of reserved memories when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  The number of reserved memories shown in the table of FIG. 11 refers to a number that does not include the reserved memory that is the determination target. That is, the number of reserved memories immediately before the reserved storage is shown. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 11, if the upper limit number of the reserved memory number is “8”, the upper limit number of the reserved memory number is substantially stored up to “9” when the reserved memory to be determined is included. It becomes possible. However, this is also expected in the case of starting winning after the process of decrementing the total pending storage number by 1 in S300 in FIG. 16 (S58 in FIG. 20) until the reach determination is made in S301. The reach determination can be performed in consideration of the start winning in such a situation.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern type determination table. In the present embodiment, a large classification (type) of a variation pattern such as the type of reach, the presence / absence of a quasi-continuous, the number of times of variation in the quasi-continuous is specified by the variation pattern type.

  The table shown in FIG. 12 is stored in the ROM 54. The table shown in FIG. 12 is a table in which a determination value to be compared with random 3 is set. The determination value used for the variation pattern type determination is set so as to differ depending on the number of reserved memories when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 12A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach shift variation pattern type determination table that is referred to when it is determined that the hit determination is a shift and the reach determination is determined to be no reach.

  When the number of reserved memories is “0 to 2” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 230”, it is determined to be a normal fluctuation, and when it is “231 to 241”, the pseudo-ream Reach).

  The normal variation refers to a variation pattern type that does not reach during the variation but shifts. The one-time quasi-continuous (non-reach) refers to a variation pattern type that is changed once after the initial change is performed and once stopped, and then re-change is performed and does not become reach in the re-change. In the present embodiment, even when non-reach is lost, a special variation pattern such as a pseudo-continuous is selected as the variation pattern type in addition to the normal variation. For this reason, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 8” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 235”, it is determined to be a normal fluctuation, and when it is “236 to 241”, the pseudo-ream Reach).

  In the table of FIG. 12A, the number of determination values is set so that the normal variation is more easily determined as the type of variation pattern as the number of reserved memories increases. In the table of FIG. 12A, the number of determination values is set so that the normal variation is more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the one-time pseudo-continuous.

  FIG. 12B is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table for loss reach that is referred to when it is determined that a hit is determined in a hit determination and a reach is determined in a reach determination.

  When the number of reserved memories is “0 to 2”, when the value extracted from random 3 is “24 to 199”, it is determined as normal reach, and when it is “18 to 23, 200 to 220”, it is determined as super reach 1. When it is “13-17, 221-225”, it is determined as Super Reach 2, and when it is “9-12, 226-230”, it is determined once as a pseudo-ream a, and “6-8, 231- 234 ”is determined to be a pseudo-series b,“ 4, 5, 235 to 237 ”is determined to be a pseudo-series a, and“ 3, 238, 239 ”is determined to be a pseudo-series b. When it is “2, 240”, it is determined as the three-time pseudo-continuous a, and when it is “1,241”, it is determined as the three-time pseudo-continuous b.

  Normal reach refers to a variation pattern type that is reached during a variation but stops without any special reach performance. The normal variation and normal reach described above are variation pattern types that can be changed to pseudo-variable variation pattern types when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The super reach 1 is a change pattern type that reaches during the change and causes a character for the super reach 1 to appear as a reach effect. The super reach 2 is a change pattern type that reaches during the change and causes a character for the super reach 2 to appear as a reach effect.

  The one-time quasi-continuous a is a variation pattern type in which the first variation is performed and temporarily stopped, then the re-variation is performed once, and the re-variation reaches reach and the same effect as the super reach 1 is performed. Say. The one-time quasi-continuous b is a variation pattern type in which the first variation is performed and temporarily stopped, and then the re-variation is performed once and reach in the re-variation and the same effect as the super reach 2 is performed. Say. The two-time quasi-continuous a is a variation pattern in which the first variation is performed and temporarily stopped, then the re-variation is performed twice, and reach is performed in the second re-variation and the same effect as the super reach 1 is performed. Refers to the type. The two-time quasi-continuous b is a variation pattern in which the first variation is performed and temporarily stopped, then the re-variation is performed twice, and reach is made in the second re-variation and the same effect as the super reach 2 is performed. Refers to the type. The three-time quasi-continuous a is a variation pattern in which after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed three times, and reach is performed in the third re-variation and the same effect as the super reach 1 is performed. Refers to the type. The three-time quasi-continuous b is a variation pattern in which the first variation is performed and temporarily stopped, then the re-variation is performed three times, and reach is performed in the third re-variation and the same effect as the super reach 2 is performed. Refers to the type. The one-time pseudo-series a, the first pseudo-series b, the two-time pseudo-series a, the two-time pseudo-series b, the three-time pseudo-series a, and the three-time pseudo-series b are also collectively referred to as a variation pattern type of the pseudo-series. . The above-described normal reach, super reach 1 and super reach 2 are also collectively referred to as non-pseudo variation pattern types.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 8”, when the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 199”, it is determined as normal reach, and when it is “200 to 220”, it is determined as super reach 1. When it is “221 to 225”, it is determined to be super reach 2; 235 to 237 ”, it is determined to be the pseudo continuation a twice,“ 238, 239 ”is determined to be the quasi continuation b b, and“ 240 ”is determined to be the quasi continuation a three times. ”Is determined to be the pseudo-ream b.

  In the table of FIG. 12B, the number of determination values is set so that the normal reach is more easily determined as the type of variation pattern as the number of reserved memories increases. As a result, it is possible to shorten the average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is large, and to reduce the occurrence of invalid start. In the table of FIG. 12B, the number of determination values is set so that the non-pseudo sequence is more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the pseudo sequence.

  FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table that is referred to when a big hit is determined in the hit determination and 16R probability variation B, 16R probability variation C, and 15R non-probability variation are determined in the big hit type determination. is there.

  When the reserved storage number is “0 to 2”, the value extracted from random 3 is determined to be normal reach when it is “1 to 7”, and is determined to be super reach 1 when it is “14 to 35”. When it is 45 to 100 ", it is determined to be super reach 2. When it is" 8, 9, 101 to 113 ", it is determined to be a pseudo-ream a, and when it is" 36 to 38, 114 to 127 ", it is determined to be once. If it is “10, 11, 128-150”, it is determined twice as the pseudo-continuous a, and if it is “39-41, 151-174”, it is determined as the pseudo-continuous b twice. , 13, 175 to 207 ", it is determined to be the three-time pseudo-continuous a, and" 42 to 44, 208-241 "is determined to be the three-time pseudo continuous b.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 8” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 7”, it is determined as normal reach, and when it is “8 to 35”, it is determined as super reach 1. When it is “36 to 100”, it is determined to be super reach 2; when it is “101 to 113”, it is determined to be pseudo-ream a; when it is “114 to 127”, it is determined to be pseudo-ream b; When it is “128 to 150”, it is determined to be a pseudo-series a, twice. When it is “151 to 174”, it is determined to be a pseudo-series b, and when it is “175 to 207”, it is determined to be a pseudo-series a. When it is “208 to 241”, it is determined to be pseudo-ream b three times.

  In the table of FIG. 12C, the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-series are more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the non-pseudo-series.

  FIG. 12D is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table that is referred to when a big hit is determined in the hit determination and the 16R probability variation A and the 15R probability variation are determined in the big hit type determination.

  When the reserved storage number is “0-2”, the value extracted from random 3 is determined as normal reach when it is “1-3”, and is determined as superreach 1 when it is “13-28”. When it is 41 to 90 ", it is determined to be super reach 2, when it is" 4 to 6, 91 to 95 ", it is determined to be a pseudo-ream a, and when it is" 29 to 32, 96 to 110 ", it is determined once. If it is “7-9, 111-120”, it is determined twice as the pseudo-ream a, and if it is “33-36, 1211-150”, it is determined as the pseudo-ream b twice as “10”. ˜12, 151-180 ”is determined as the three-time pseudo-continuous a, and“ 37-40, 181-241 ”is determined as the three-time pseudo-continuous b.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 8” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 3”, it is determined as normal reach, and when it is “4 to 28”, it is determined as super reach 1. When it is “29 to 90”, it is determined to be super reach 2; when it is “91 to 95”, it is determined to be pseudo-ream a; when it is “96 to 110”, it is determined to be pseudo-ream b; When it is "111 to 120", it is determined to be a pseudo-ream a twice, when it is "121 to 150", it is determined to be a pseudo-ream b b, and when it is "151 to 180", it is determined to be a pseudo-ream a 3 times. When it is “181 to 241”, it is determined to be a pseudo-ream b three times.

  In the table of FIG. 12D, the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-series are more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the non-pseudo-series.

  12A and 12B is compared with the table for the big hit in FIGS. 12C and 12D, the table for the big hit is more than the table for the off time. In this table, the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-ream is easily determined as the type of variation pattern. In other words, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher when the variation due to the pseudo-continuous is performed than when the variation due to the non-pseudo-continuous is performed. In other words, in the re-variable display pattern, the selection ratio is set so that the ratio that is executed when the display result of the identification information is the specific display result is higher than that when the display result of the identification information is the non-specific display result. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit when the variation due to the pseudo-ream is performed rather than when the variation due to the non-pseudo-ream is performed.

  12A and 12B is compared with the table for big hits in FIGS. 12C and 12D, the table for big hits is better than the table for outage. In the case of the table, when the pseudo-series is determined as the type of the variation pattern, the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-series having a large number of variations is easily determined. In other words, even when the fluctuation due to the pseudo-ream is performed, the number of determination values is set such that the greater the number of fluctuations, the higher the reliability that is a big hit. For this reason, even when the fluctuation due to the pseudo-ream is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit as the number of fluctuations is further increased.

  12B is compared with the table for the big hit in FIGS. 12C and 12D, the table for the big hit is more than the table for the big hit in the case of the reach lost. The number of determination values is set so that the variation pattern type in which super reach 2 is performed is more easily determined than the variation pattern type in which super reach 1 is performed as the reach type. In other words, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher when the change due to the super reach 2 is performed than when the change due to the super reach 1 is performed. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit when the change by the super reach 2 is performed rather than when the change by the super reach 1 is performed.

  Further, when the table of FIG. 12C is compared with the table of FIG. 12D, the table of FIG. 12D has a pseudo continuous pattern as the variation pattern type rather than the table of FIG. The number of determination values is set so that it is easy to be determined, and the number of determination values is set so that a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variations is easily selected. That is, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability of 16R probability variation A big hit or 15R probability variation big hit becomes higher when the variation due to the pseudo continuous is made than when the variation due to the non-pseudo continuous is made. ing. Further, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability of 16R probability variation A big hit or 15R probability variation big hit becomes higher as the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-ream increases. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for 16R probability variation A big hit or 15R probability variation big hit when the variation due to the pseudo continuous is performed than when the variation due to the non-pseudo continuous is performed. In addition, as the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-ream increases, the player can have a sense of expectation for 16R probability variation A big hit or 15R probability variation big hit.

  Further, when the table of FIG. 12C is compared with the table of FIG. 12D, the table of FIG. 12D is more likely to reach the variation pattern reach than the table of FIG. The number of determination values is set so that the super reach 2 is easily determined. That is, the determination value is set so that the reliability of the 16R probability variation A big hit or the 15R probability variation big hit is higher when the reach production by the super reach 2 is performed than when the reach production by the super reach 1 is performed. Number is set. For this reason, when the reach production by the super reach 2 is performed rather than when the reach production by the super reach 1 is performed, the player has a sense of expectation for the 16R probability variation A big hit or the 15R probability variation big hit. Can do.

  FIG. 12E is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table that is referred to when a small hit is determined in the hit determination.

  When the number of reserved memories is “0-2”, the value extracted from random 3 is determined as special normal reach when it is “1-7”, and is determined as special super reach 1 when it is “14-35”. , "45 to 100", it is determined to be a special super reach 2, and "8, 9, 101 to 113" is determined to be a special one-time pseudo-ream a and "36 to 38, 114 to 127" Sometimes it is determined as the special one-time pseudo-ream b, when it is “10, 11, 128 to 150”, it is determined as the special two-time pseudo-ream a, and when it is “39 to 41, 151 to 174”, it is determined as the special two-time pseudo ream. b is determined as a special three-time pseudo-ream a when it is “12, 13, 175-207”, and is determined as a special three-time pseudo-ream b when “42-44, 208-241”.

  The special normal reach is a variation pattern type that differs from the above-described normal reach, for example, in a variation time, and is a variation pattern type that stops without performing a special reach effect although it reaches during the variation. The special super reach 1 is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-described super reach 1, and is a variation pattern type that reaches during the variation and causes a character for the super reach 1 to appear as a reach effect. The special super reach 2 is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-described super reach 2, for example, a variation pattern type that reaches during the variation and causes a character for the super reach 2 to appear as a reach effect.

  The special one-time quasi-ream a is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-described one-time quasi-ream a, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed once. A variation pattern type in which re-variation is reached and the same effect as that of super reach 1 is performed. The special one-time quasi-continuous b is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-mentioned one-time quasi-continuous b, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed once. It means a variation pattern type in which the re-variation reaches reach and the same effect as that of super reach 2 is performed.

  The special two-time quasi-ream a is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-described two-time quasi-ream a, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed twice. A variation pattern type in which the second re-variation is reached and the same effect as the super reach 1 is performed. The special two-time quasi-ream b is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-described two-time quasi-ream b, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed twice. A variation pattern type in which the second re-variation is reached and the same effect as the super reach 2 is performed. The special three-time quasi-ream a is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-mentioned three-time quasi-ream a, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, re-variation is performed three times. It means a variation pattern type that reaches in the third re-variation and performs the same effect as Super Reach 1. The special three-time quasi-continuous b is a variation pattern type having a variation time different from that of the above-mentioned three-time quasi-continuous b, and after the initial variation is performed and temporarily stopped, the re-variation is performed three times. A variation pattern type in which the third re-variation is reached and the same effect as the super reach 2 is performed. The special one-time pseudo-ream b, the special one-time pseudo-ream b, the special two-time pseudo-ream b, the special two-time pseudo-ream b, the special three-time pseudo-ream b, and the special three-time pseudo-ream b are combined into a pseudo-series. It is also called a variation pattern type. Further, the above-described special normal reach, special super reach 1, and special super reach 2 are collectively referred to as non-pseudo variation pattern types.

  When the number of reserved memories is “3 to 8” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 7”, it is determined as special normal reach, and when it is “8 to 35”, it is determined as special super reach 1 When it is “36-100”, it is determined as the special super reach 2; when it is “101-113”, it is determined as the special one-time pseudo-ream a; when it is “114-127”, the special one-time pseudo-ream b When it is “128 to 150”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream a, when it is “151 to 174”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream b, and when it is “175 to 207”, it is determined as a special 3 It is determined to be the pseudo-simulation series a, and when it is “208 to 241”, it is determined to be the special three-time simulation series b.

  In the table of FIG. 12 (E), the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo pattern is more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the non-pseudo series.

  FIG. 12F is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table that is referred to when it is determined that the big hit is determined in the hit determination and the 2R probability variation is determined in the big hit type determination.

  When the number of reserved memories is “0 to 2”, the value extracted from random 3 is determined to be special normal reach when it is “1 to 3”, and is determined to be special super reach 1 when it is “13 to 28”. , "41-90", the special super reach 2 is determined, and "4-6, 91-95" is determined as the special one-time pseudo-ream, "29-32, 96-110" Sometimes it is determined as a special one-time pseudo-ream b, when it is “7-9, 111-120”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream a, and when it is “33-36, 121-150”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream. When it is “10-12, 151-180”, it is determined as a special three-time pseudo-ream a, and when it is “37-40, 181-241”, it is determined as a special three-time pseudo-ream b.

  When the number of reserved storage is “3 to 8” and the value extracted from random 3 is “1 to 3”, it is determined as special normal reach, and when it is “4 to 28”, it is determined as special super reach 1 When it is “29 to 90”, it is determined as the special super reach 2; when it is “91 to 95”, it is determined as the special one-time pseudo-ream a; When it is “111-120”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream a, when it is “121-150”, it is determined as a special two-time pseudo-ream b, and when it is “151-180”, it is determined as a special 3 It is determined to be the pseudo-simulation series a, and when it is “181 to 241”, it is determined to be the special three-time simulation series b.

  In the table of FIG. 12 (F), the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-series are more easily determined as the variation pattern type than the non-pseudo-series.

  As described above, the variation type is selected from a plurality of common types depending on whether the hit type is “2R probability variation” or “small hit”. Thus, the player is not able to specify whether the variation pattern type is “2R probability variation” or “small hit”. Further, as described above, it is configured so that the player cannot specify whether the winning game state is “2R probability change” or “small hit”. As a result, the small hit can be used as a so-called false hit of 2R probability variation.

  On the other hand, in the table of FIG. 12F, the number of determination values is set so that the pseudo-continuity is easily determined as the variation pattern type, and the table of FIG. The number of determination values is set so that pseudo-reams with a large number of times are easily selected. That is, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability that becomes the 2R probability variation big hit becomes higher as the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-ream increases. For this reason, as the number of times of re-variation in the pseudo-ream increases, the player can have a sense of expectation for the 2R probability variation big hit.

  In the tables (A) to (F) shown in FIG. 12, all the determination values determined in a pseudo-continuous manner among the determination values set corresponding to the storage number “3 to 8” are stored. Among the determination values set corresponding to the stored number “0 to 2”, they are included in the determination values determined in a pseudo-continuous manner.

  Further, in the tables of (A) to (F) shown in FIG. 12, super reach 1 (including pseudo-continuous and non-pseudo-continuous) among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved storage number “3-8”. ) Are included in the determination values determined to be super reach 1 among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved storage number “0 to 2”.

  Further, in the tables of (A) to (F) shown in FIG. 12, super reach 2 (including pseudo-continuous and non-pseudo-continuous) among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved storage number “3-8”. ) Are included in the determination values determined to be super reach 2 among the determination values set in correspondence with the reserved storage number “0 to 2”.

  For this reason, when the extracted value of random 3 matches the determination value determined in a pseudo-continuous manner among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved storage number “3 to 8”, it is always regardless of the reserved storage number. Determined to be a pseudo-ream. Similarly, when the extracted value of random 3 matches the determination value determined for super reach 1 among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved memory number “3 to 8”, regardless of the reserved memory number, Reach production is always determined as Super Reach 1. Similarly, when the extracted value of random 3 matches the determination value determined by super reach 2 among the determination values set corresponding to the reserved storage number “3 to 8”, the reach is reached regardless of the reserved storage number. The production is always determined as Super Reach 2.

  In the table shown in FIG. 12, similarly to the table shown in FIG. 11, the process of subtracting 1 from the total pending storage number is performed in S300 in FIG. 16 (S58 in FIG. 20), and reach determination is performed in S301. In the meantime, it is expected that a start winning will be made, and the variation pattern type can be determined based on the start winning in such a situation.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table used for selecting one variation pattern from a plurality of types of variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern type determined in FIG. In the present embodiment, a specific variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern, such as the presence or absence of a slip effect, and the number of displacement frames between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol when there is a deviation after reaching reach. The table shown in FIG. 13 is stored in the ROM 54. Further, the table shown in FIG. 13 is a table in which determination values to be compared with random 4 are set.

  FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern selection table when normal variation is determined as the variation pattern type. When the value extracted from the random 4 is “1-210”, it is determined as a variation pattern with no right symbol slip, and when it is “211—251”, it is determined as a variation pattern with right symbol slip.

  FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern selection table when the normal reach is determined as the variation pattern type.

  When the value extracted from random 4 is “1”, it is determined to be a variation pattern in which the right symbol does not slip and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by one frame, and when “2-10”, the right symbol There is no slipping, and the variation pattern is determined so that the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by two frames. When “11-30”, the right symbol does not slip and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by three frames. When the pattern is “150”, the right symbol slips and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by one frame. When “151” to “155”, the right symbol slips In addition, the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are determined to be a variation pattern that shifts by two frames. When “156 to 165”, the right symbol slips and the left and right symbols and middle symbol shift by three frames. It is determined to change patterns that.

  In FIG. 13B, the variation pattern determined for some of the values (1 to 30, 150 to 165) that can be extracted from the random 4 has been described. However, values (31 to 149, 166) that are not illustrated are described. ˜251) are set so that one variation pattern is determined in the same manner.

  FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern selection table when normal reach is determined with big hits (in this case, including 16R probability variation A, B, C, 15R probability variation, and 15R non-probability variation) as the variation pattern type. It is. When the value extracted from the random number 4 is “1-50”, it is determined as a variation pattern without a right symbol slip, and when it is “51-251”, it is determined as a variation pattern with a right symbol slip.

  FIG. 13D is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern selection table when the pseudo-continuous a is determined twice as a variation pattern type.

  When the value extracted from random 4 is “1 to 20”, it is determined as a variation pattern in which the right symbol does not slip in the final variation and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by one frame. In some cases, it is determined that the right pattern does not slip in the final variation and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by two frames. In the case of “31 to 37”, the right symbol does not slip in the final variation and the left and right symbols are determined. Is determined to be a variation pattern in which the right symbol slips in the final variation and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by one frame. In the case of “131-155”, the variation pattern in which the right symbol slips in the final variation and the left and right symbols and the middle symbol are shifted by two frames is determined. Is, there is slip of the right symbol and is the middle and right symbols symbol is determined variation pattern comprising three frame shift in the final change when a "156-165".

  In FIG. 13D, the variation pattern determined for some of the values (1 to 37, 91 to 165) that can be extracted from the random 4 has been described. However, values (38 to 90, 166) that are not illustrated are described. ˜251) are set so that one variation pattern is determined in the same manner.

  Here, comparing each of the tables in FIGS. 13A to 13D, the ratio of the variation pattern having slippage is higher when the reach is shifted than when the non-reach is shifted, and The determination value is set so that the ratio determined to the variation pattern with slip is higher when the hit is made than when the reach is lost. That is, the number of determination values is set so that the reliability of winning is higher when the variation display without slip is performed than when the variation display without slip is performed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the variation display without slipping is performed than when the variation display without slipping is performed.

  In addition, when comparing each of the tables in FIGS. 13B and 13D, the number of shift frames between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol is greater when reaching the quasi-ream rather than reaching instead of the quasi-ream. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined by the smaller variation pattern becomes higher. For this reason, the number of misplaced frames between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol is smaller when the pseudo-variable display is performed than when the non-pseudo-variable display is performed. Can be held by the player.

  In FIG. 13, the variation patterns belonging to some variation pattern types among the variation pattern types shown in FIG. 12 are illustrated and described. However, variation pattern selection tables are similarly provided for other variation pattern types. In other words, one variation pattern is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for transmitting the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the received variation pattern command, for example, a non-reach normal variation pattern with no slip and no slip, or a normal reach with left and right and middle shifts by one frame without slip and slip. Whether it is a pattern, a normal reach pattern without big hits and no slip, or a two-time pseudo-continuous a pattern with two frames shifted left and right without slipping and slipping. It can be specified.

  Further, in FIG. 13, as an example of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there has been described an example in which the right symbol is slipped, and the left and right symbols are different from the middle symbol in the case where there is a shift after reaching reach. However, the plurality of types of variation patterns are not limited to those having different points. The plurality of types of variation patterns, for example, have different types of characters that appear when reaching reach, the stop order and stop of each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. The timing may be different or the variation time may be different.

  Note that the table shown in FIG. 13 may be configured to determine the variation pattern according to the determination value corresponding to the number of reserved storages, similarly to the tables shown in FIGS. 11 and 12. In this case, the reserved storage number may be configured to be divided into cases in the range of 0 to 8. As a result, it is also expected that a start winning will be made after the process of subtracting 1 from the total pending storage number in S300 in FIG. 16 (S58 in FIG. 20) until the reach determination is made in S301. The variation pattern can be selected in consideration of the start-up prize in various situations.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the example in which the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined regardless of the current gaming state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern type and the variation pattern may be determined using a table corresponding to the current gaming state. For example, a table may be provided for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern according to each of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state of the game state.

  In the table shown in FIG. 12, the example in which the pseudo-continuous variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern in the table shown in FIG. In other words, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not to become a pseudo-continuous by determining the variation pattern type. However, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations may not be determined only by determining the variation pattern type, but may be specified by performing the variation pattern selection.

  For example, one variation pattern type specifies a plurality of types of patterns including a pseudo-ream (including a plurality of types of pseudo-reams with different numbers of re-variations) and a variation other than a pseudo-ream (normal reach, super reach 1, etc.). It may be. Then, the presence or absence of a pseudo-series may be specified depending on whether or not a pseudo-series variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern.

  In addition, the classification of the variation pattern types may be one type that has the same super reach type (such as super reach 1) when reaching the reach state. Then, the presence or absence of a pseudo-series may be specified depending on whether or not a pseudo-series variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern.

  When configured in this way, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to determine the variation pattern type in the look-ahead process, further determine the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type, and the variation pattern determination result. It may be configured to transmit a start winning designation command including the instruction control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). In other words, a unique variation pattern command is preset for each variation pattern that can be determined using the tables shown in FIGS. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display 9a or the second design design display 9b so as to start the design design variation display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start the variation display of the effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H) indicate whether or not to make a hit, and the type of hit (out of place, 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R probability variation C, 15R probability variation, 15R non-accuracy variation, 2R probability variation, small contact ) Is an effect control command. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C08 (H) are designated as the display results. It is called a command.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are used as a decorative symbol variation display (variation) corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display. An effect display device 9 that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces an effect in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (designating) symbol during the variable symbol display time is subjected to the decorative symbol variation or by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is to be changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs the variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variation display time of the second special symbol.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination designation command) indicating that the display (change) of the effect symbol (and decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game or the start of a jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command that designates that the first start winning is given by “C0” that is the upper byte (MODE) and designates the prefetch determination result by “XX” that is the lower byte (EXT). (First start winning designation command). The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command that designates that the second start winning is given by “C1” that is the upper byte (MODE) and designates the prefetch determination result by “XX” that is the lower byte (EXT). (Second start winning designation command). The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  Prefetching refers to reading out random number extraction values based on random number extraction values at the start of variation, and determining later based on the read out extraction values. This refers to prefetching the result of the wax determination. Further, the prefetch determination result refers to a determination result obtained by prefetching. In the present embodiment, control for prefetching the hit determination, reach determination, and variation pattern type and obtaining the prefetch determination result is executed as soon as possible at the start winning based on the random number value extracted at the start winning. The prefetch determination result is configured such that the determination result is specified by “XX” which is the lower byte of the start winning designation command. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, based on the start winning designation command, the advance notice is executed from the stage before the start of variable display by the start winning.

  Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that 1 is added to the total pending storage number. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the pending memory count subtraction designation command, and adds the total pending memory count. May be specified by transmitting a command for specifying the total pending storage number for specifying the total pending storage number after subtraction.

  The presentation control command described above has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the effect control command is shown in FIG. Depending on the contents, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when performing a hold display based on a valid start winning. When the pre-reading described above is performed at the time of starting winning, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a starting winning designation command corresponding to the pre-reading determination result.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for specifically explaining the start winning designation command. As described above, as the upper byte of the start winning designation command, “C0” is set when a winning to the first start winning opening 13 is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, and the second start winning opening 14 is set. “C1” is set when the winning is detected by the second start port switch 14a.

  The lower byte of the start winning designation command is determined, for example, when the pre-reading for the start winning is not performed when the pre-reading prohibition state is set, for example, when it is already determined that the big win is pre-reading. When “00” is set to specify none, “01” is set when it is determined that the prefetch determination result is out of place and normal fluctuation, and when the prefetch determination result is determined to be the pseudo-ream a once with 16R probability variation A Is set to “0F”. Similarly, with respect to the other prefetch determination results, data predetermined so that one prefetch determination result is specified is set as the lower byte of the start winning designation command.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the start winning designation command, a process for holding display, a process for determining whether or not to perform a prefetching notice, a process for selecting a prefetching notice type, and the like are performed. Do. The pre-reading notice refers to an effect in which information related to the pre-reading determination result is notified from the stage before the start of variable display due to the start winning.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 changes and displays a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol every time the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b starts to display the variation of the special symbol. A result designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls to start the decorative symbol variation display based on the variation pattern command and the display result designation command, and controls the effect display device 9 to start variation display of the effect symbol. .

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start game port 13. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, the start opening switch passing process is executed (S311 and S312). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the special symbol variation display. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to S305 or S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decoration symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Pre-round start process (S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-round start process, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the in-round processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to S306. Note that the pre-round start process is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-round start process is a process for starting a big hit game. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is the probability variation state, and the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation flag is reset (regardless of whether or not the big hit is a probability variation that is a probability variation. )

  In-round processing (S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, a time for opening the special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example).

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Control for transmitting the effect control command in the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there is still the remaining number of open times, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when either one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. It is confirmed whether or not there is (S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to S222.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 19A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 19A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 19A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. As will be described later, the reserved specific area is also formed in the RAM of the microcomputer 100 for arithmetic control, and the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the command transmitted from the main control board 560 as shown in FIG. The same data as the data stored in the reserved specific area shown in FIG. This state is shown in FIG. The production-side reserved specific area shown in FIG. 43 will be described later.

  FIG. 19B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 19B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The first reserved memory buffer and the second reserved memory buffer are also formed in the RAM of the operation control microcomputer 100, as will be described later, and the effect control CPU 101 responds to the command transmitted from the main control board 560. Based on this, the same data as that stored in the storage area shown in FIG. 19B is stored in the RAM of the microcomputer 100 for operation control.

  Note that, as described above, the reserved storage method is not limited to using a plurality of areas such as the holding specific area and the storage area, and may be stored using one predetermined area. In the hold storage method, random numbers extracted due to winnings in the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 are respectively determined in the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14. Any method may be used as long as the winning order can be specified up to the upper limit number (for example, 4). For example, in order to specify data for specifying which one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is to be won and a random number extracted due to the winning using one area. It is also possible to store up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) determined for each of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 in the order of winning.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts a value from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S215). In the process of S215, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random numbers 2-1, 2-2, 3, 4 (see FIG. 7) that are software random numbers are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (S216). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the total reserved memory number counter is “1”, that is, whether or not there is a reserved memory stored prior to the start winning (S217). When it is determined that the value of the total pending storage number counter is not “1”, whether or not a prefetch big hit flag or a prefetch small hit flag set in a prefetch process described later is set, that is, a big hit or a small hit is held It is determined whether or not there is a memory (S218).

  When neither the prefetch big hit flag nor the prefetch small hit flag is set, it is determined whether or not the low base time is set (S218a). This determination is made based on whether or not the short time flag is set. If the time flag is not set, it is determined that the base is low, and the process proceeds to S219. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is set, it is determined that the base time is not low, and the process proceeds to S221.

  In S219, when neither the prefetch big hit flag nor the prefetch small hit flag is set, a first prefetch process described later is performed, and the process proceeds to S220. In the first look-ahead process, based on the random number value extracted by the first start winning this time, a process for pre-reading whether or not it is a win and what type of variation pattern type is performed.

  In S220, a first start winning designation command corresponding to the prefetch determination result in the first prefetch process is set. The set command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (S28 in FIG. 5).

  As will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a hold display and determines whether or not to execute a prefetch notice, based on the start prize designation command start winning according to the prefetch determination result.

  When it is determined in S218 that the prefetch big hit flag or the prefetch small hit flag is set, there is a holding memory that becomes a big hit or small hit, and therefore the process proceeds to S221 without performing the prefetch processing for the start winning. . In S218 and S229, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not only the pre-fetch big hit flag is set, and the pre-read processing is not performed for the start winning prize only when there is a holding memory that is a big hit. Good.

  In S221, a first start winning designation command with no determination result is set. Thereby, the hold display based on the start winning is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S217 that the value of the total pending storage number counter is “1”, the variable display based on the start winning is ready to be started, so the first look-ahead process and the start winning designation command transmission The process proceeds to S222 without performing the process.

  For S222 to S232, in the same manner as the processing shown in S211 to S221, on the condition that the second start port switch 14a is turned on, “second” is set in the reserved specific area and the extracted random number is stored in the second reserved state. When the second prefetching process is performed based on the value of the total pending storage number counter and the prefetching big hit flag, etc., the second start winning designation command corresponding to the prefetching determination result is stored in the memory number buffer (S225, S226). Set (S231), if the second look-ahead process is not performed, a process of setting a second start winning designation command without a determination result is performed (S232).

  The difference from the processing shown in S211 to S221 is that, in S229a, it is determined whether or not the high base time is set. This determination is made based on whether or not the time reduction flag is set as described above. When the time reduction flag is set, it is determined that the base time is high, and the process proceeds to S230. When the time reduction flag is not set, it is determined that the time is not high, and the process proceeds to S232.

  As described above, when the base is low, the first prefetch process (S219) is executed, while the second prefetch process (S230) is prohibited. When the base is high, the first prefetch process (S219) is prohibited. On the other hand, the second prefetch process (S230) is executed. As a result, when the base is low, the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning port 13 is allowed, while the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning port 14 is allowed. Execution is prohibited. Further, at the time of high base, execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is prohibited, while based on the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 Execution of the pre-reading notice effect is allowed.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of S213-221 and the process of S224-232 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected. As described above, when the processes of S213 to 218 and the processes of S224 to 228 are realized by one common routine, the reserved storage buffer shown in FIG. 19 is stored in the first reserved memory (first special symbol) and the second It may be used in common with reserved storage (second special symbol). Specifically, in such a common reserved storage buffer, information indicating whether the storage is “first” or “second” in the order in which winning occurs in each storage area, and extracted. Information indicating random values (random R, random 2-1, 2-2, 3, 4, etc.) is stored, and the “second” is preferentially read and used for variable display. . As in the case of the above-described embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved memories may be managed separately for each of the “first” and “second” reserved memories. Further, regarding the control of whether or not to perform the pre-reading process according to the set state of the time reduction flag, the time reduction flag is set after determining which of “first” and “second” is stored. If the time reduction flag is set at “first”, the first prefetching process is executed. If the time reduction flag is not set at “second”, the second prefetching process is executed. Control to execute.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch process of S219. The CPU 56 determines whether or not the random R value extracted in S215 is a normal jackpot determination value (normal determination value (common jackpot determination value in FIG. 8A)) (S240). Thus, in the big hit determination in the prefetch process, the normal big hit determination value (common big hit determination value) is used. For this reason, even if it is determined that a big hit is made in the prefetching process, the actual variation display becomes out of date without prefetching whether or not the gaming state when actually starting the variation display is the probability variation state. Inconvenience can be prevented.

  When it is determined in S240 that the value is a normal big hit determination value, a prefetch big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S241). Further, the CPU 56 selects the first special figure jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8C (S242), and determines the jackpot type based on the value extracted from the random 2-1 in S215 (S243). . Then, the big hit variation pattern type determination table (FIGS. 12C, 12D, and 12F) corresponding to the big hit type determined in S243 is selected (S244), and the number of reserved memories is 3-8 in S215. The variation pattern type is determined based on the value extracted from random 3 according to the determination value (S252).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S240 that it is not the normal big hit determination value, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination value (see the determination value in the left column in the case of the first special figure). (S245). When it is determined that the value is a small hit determination value, a pre-read small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set (S246). Then, the variation pattern type determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 12 (E) is selected (S247), and the process proceeds to S252, based on the value extracted from random 3 according to the determination value of the number of reserved storages 3-8. The variation pattern type is determined.

  When it is determined in S245 that it is not the small hit determination value, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 11 is referred to, and the determination value of 6 to 8 (the common reach determination value) and the random 2-2 extracted in S215. The presence / absence of reach is determined according to the value from (S248). Thus, in the reach determination in the prefetch process, a determination value (common reach determination value) with the number of reserved storages of 6 to 8 is used. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the reach is not reached in the actual variation display even though the reach is determined in the prefetch process.

  As a result of the determination in S248, it is determined whether or not to reach (S249). If it is determined to reach, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment reach shown in FIG. 12B is selected (S250), and reach is determined. When it is determined not to be selected, the non-reach deviation variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 12A is selected (S251), and the process proceeds to S252 to select a random number 3 according to the determination value of 3 to 8 in the pending storage number. The variation pattern type is determined based on the value extracted from.

  As in S252, in the variation pattern type determination in the look-ahead process, a determination value having a pending storage number of 3 to 8 is used. For this reason, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is a pseudo-continuous pattern by prefetching, the actual variation display is also performed using the pseudo-variation variation pattern. Further, when the reach effect is determined to be the variation pattern type of the super reach 1 in the prefetching, the reach effect of the super reach 1 is also performed in the actual variation display. Further, when the reach effect is determined to be the variation pattern type of the super reach 2 in the prefetching, the reach effect of the super reach 2 is also performed in the actual variation display. As a result, for example, inconveniences such as the fact that the pre-reading process does not become pseudo-continuous in the actual change display, or the reach type is determined to be super reach 1 in the pre-reading process. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as not becoming super reach 1 in actual fluctuation display.

  Although the first prefetch process has been described with reference to FIG. 18, in the second prefetch process, as in the first prefetch process, the prefetch determination is performed with reference to a predetermined table based on the random number value extracted based on the second start winning prize. Processing is performed.

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not “second” is stored in the pending specific area (see FIG. 19A) (S52). That is, “second” which is the reserved storage specifying information based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (hold specified area) shown in FIG. A determination is made whether or not there is. When “second” is not stored, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “ Data indicating "first" is set (S53). On the other hand, if “second” is stored, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  Along with the processing of S53, the CPU 56 deletes the “first” reserved specific area stored in the area 1 among the reserved specific areas stored in the reserved storage specific information storage area (the reserved specific area). Processing is performed to shift each of the stored storage specific information stored in the areas subsequent to the reserved specific area 2 one by one in the direction of the reserved specific area 1. The CPU 56, together with the processing of S54, among the “second” reserved storage specifying information stored in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), the oldest reserved storage specifying information (the lowest number of the reserved storage specifying information) A process of deleting the reserved storage specific information stored in the specific area is performed. Then, a process of shifting the reserved storage specifying information after the erased area one by one to the erased reserved specific area side is performed.

  If there is at least one second reserved memory in the second reserved memory buffer by the control of S52 to S54, the second special symbol display 8b and the second decorative symbol display 9b based on the second reserved memory are displayed. The variable display is executed with priority over the first reserved storage.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S310 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a hit determination (S61, S62). In the hit determination, the big hit determination value (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) determined in advance according to the gaming state is compared with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, the big hit or the small hit is determined. Execute the process to determine. In the hit determination at the start of variation, a determination value corresponding to the current gaming state is used. For this reason, even if the determination value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of prefetching is used, the result of the determination is different. obtain. As a result, even when the above-described pre-reading notice is not performed, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

  The hit determination is configured such that when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability variation state (normal game state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . If it is determined to be a big hit in S61, the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game when it is determined to be the probability change big hit or suddenly the probability change big hit, and is reset at the start of the big hit game when the next big hit occurs. (Even if the next big hit is a promising big hit, it is reset once at the start of the big hit game).

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (S63). Then, the process proceeds to S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, when the first special symbol is targeted, the table shown in FIG. 8C is selected, and the second special symbol is selected. If the target is selected, the table shown in FIG. 8D is selected (S72). Types ("16R probability variation A", "16R probability variation B", "16R probability variation C", "15R") corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area “Probability change”, “15R non-probability change”, and “2R probability change”) are determined as jackpot types (S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “16R probability variation A”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “16R probability variation B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is “16R probability variation C”, “03” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “15R probability variation”, “04” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, “05” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “2R probability change”, “06” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. .

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “2” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is set as a special symbol. Decide on a stop symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “2R probability variation”, “8” which is the 2R big hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. “1” is determined to be “16R probability variation A”, “3” is determined when “16R probability variation B” is determined, and “7” is stopped when “16R probability variation C” is determined. Decide on a design. Further, when it is determined to be “15R probability change”, “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol when “5R” is determined and “15R non-change probability” is determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91).

  When the big hit flag is set, as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, the table shown in FIGS. 12C and 12D based on the big hit type stored in S74. ), (F) is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  If the big hit flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S93). If the small hit flag is set (Y in S93), the table shown in FIG. 12E is selected (S94). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  If the small hit flag is not set in S93 (N in S93), that is, if neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the reach determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to reach the reach state is determined according to the number of reserved memories and the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) stored in the random number buffer area (S97).

  Then, in the determination at S97, it is determined whether or not it has been determined to reach the reach state (S98). If it is determined to reach the reach state, the table shown in FIG. 12B is selected (S99). On the other hand, when it is determined not to reach the reach state, the table shown in FIG. 12A is selected (S100). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  In S101, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer area in accordance with the determination value corresponding to the current reserved storage number in the table selected in any of S92, S94, S99, and S100. The variation pattern type is determined based on the random number (random 3). In the reach determination and the variation pattern type determination at the start of variation, a determination value corresponding to the current number of reserved memories is used. For this reason, even if it is determined that it is not reach at the time of prefetching, it is determined that reach is reached at the start of fluctuation, or even if it is determined that it is not pseudo-continuous at the time of prefetching, May be determined. As a result, even when the above-mentioned prefetch notice is not performed, the player can have a sense of expectation for becoming a reach or a pseudo-ream.

  Next, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13) corresponding to the variation pattern type determined in S101 (S103). Further, the CPU 56 refers to the table selected in S103, and determines the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) stored in the random number buffer area (S105).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S106). Thereby, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits any one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 8 designation) (see FIG. 14) according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If the jackpot flag is set, a display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S111). Thereby, the display result designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  In S110, when the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S116, and it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the processing of S116, it sets a display result 8 designation command (S117). When the small hit flag is not set, a display result 1 designation command is set (S118). Thereby, the set display result designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  Then, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating that the total reserved memory number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (S119). Instead of transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result designation command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S120).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125), and when the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control microcomputer 100 (S132). Thereby, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the hourly flag (S134), and sets a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). Thereby, the big hit start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (including 16R probability variation jackpot and 15R probability variation jackpot), a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / surprise start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (S136). When a big hit occurs, the same value as the big win display time timer is set in the big winning opening control timer. Thereafter, in the pre-round start process, the big prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big prize opening is opened and the round is started.

  Moreover, the release mode according to the jackpot type is set (S137). As the release mode, the number of rounds described in FIG. 9A and data for specifying the release mode of one round are set. For example, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation A”, data for specifying that the number of rounds is 16R, the number of rounds released is 3, and the time of opening once is 5 seconds is set. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-round start process (S305) (S138).

  In S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S140). Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (S141). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S143). When the small hit flag is set, the small hit / probability start designation command is set in the production control microcomputer 100 (S144). As a result, the small hit / probability start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (S145). When a small hit occurs, the same value as the small hit display time timer is set in the big winning opening control timer. Thereafter, in the pre-start process for small hits, the big prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big prize opening starts to be opened.

  Also, an opening mode corresponding to the small hit is set (S146). As shown in FIG. 9B, the release mode corresponding to the small hit is set, for example, data for specifying that the number of times of opening is 2 times and the time of opening once is 0.5 seconds. . Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S147). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S148).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the round start pre-processing (S305) in the special symbol process. In the pre-round start process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer by -1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is set (S403). Thereby, the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. The CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the round number counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 21 to open to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S404), and decrements the value of the round number counter set as the opening mode by −1 (S404). S405).

  In addition, the one-time opening time is set in the big winning opening control timer according to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened in one opening, and the number of one round opening is set as the number of large winning opening control (S406). For example, when the big hit type is “16R probability variation A”, the special winning opening control timer is set to 5 seconds, which is a one-time opening time, and the special winning opening control number is set to three, which is the number of one round opening. . Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S306) (S407).

  27 and 28 are flowcharts showing the round process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the in-round processing, whether or not the value of the in-round release waiting timer indicating the waiting time until the special winning opening is reopened within one round is equal to or greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is in the waiting for release state during the round Is determined (S410). When it is determined that the in-round release waiting timer is not equal to or greater than 0, that is, when it is determined not to be in the open waiting state in the round but to open the big prize opening, the CPU 56 sets the value of the big prize opening control timer to − 1 (S411).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S412). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S413). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S414). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S415). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S412 and S413 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big winning opening (S416). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of times of winning the prize winning control (S417), and confirms whether or not the number of times of winning the prize winning control has become “0”, that is, whether or not the opening of the prize winning opening has been opened by one round opening number. (S418). When the number of winning prize control is not “0”, a value corresponding to a predetermined waiting time is set as the value of the in-round release waiting timer, and the in-round processing is ended.

  The value of the in-round release waiting timer is determined in S410 as described above. When it is determined that the value of the in-round release waiting timer is 0 or more, 1 is subtracted from the value of the in-round release waiting timer (S421), and it is determined whether or not 0 has been reached (S422). When it is determined that the value of the in-round opening waiting timer is 0, the opening time is set once again in the large winning opening control timer in order to open the large winning opening again (S423), and the solenoid 21 is driven again. Then, control for opening the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) is performed (S424), and the in-round processing is ended. Thereby, after a predetermined waiting time elapses, a process for opening the big prize opening again is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the in-round release waiting timer is not 0, the in-round processing is terminated as it is. As a result, the open waiting state in the round is continued.

  In S420 of the present embodiment, the same time as the interval period between rounds shown in S440 of FIG. 28 is set as the predetermined waiting time. As a result, the waiting time in the round and the interval time between rounds are the same, so from the opening mode of the big prize opening, it may be impossible for the player to specify whether the round has ended or is in the round. it can. As a result, for example, when the 16R probability variation big hit is reached, it is impossible to specify which type of 16R probability variation big hit until a certain timing is reached as described with reference to FIG. In addition to having a sense of expectation that the jackpot will continue, it is possible to give the player an impression that the jackpot will develop and to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S418 that the number of times of control of the big prize opening has become “0”, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S419), and the value of the round number counter is confirmed (S438). When the value of the round number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates a post-big opening opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating a display state according to the number of rounds after the big winning opening is opened (after the end of the round). ) Is set (S439). Thereby, the designation command after the special winning opening is opened is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed before the round start The value is updated according to (S305) (S441).

  When the value of the round number counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets the big hit end 2 designation command when the data showing the big hit type is data showing the probability variation big hit (S442, S447). Thereby, the big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to a jackpot end time (for example, a time to notify the effect display device 9 that the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot end display timer (S449), and sets the jackpot flag and the pre-read jackpot flag. It is reset (S449a), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S450). When the prefetch big hit flag is reset, the prefetch process can be executed for the subsequent start winnings (S218, S219, S229, and S230 in FIG. 17). It should be noted that the timing for resetting the look-ahead jackpot flag may be during the period from the end of the variable display to be notified to the end of the jackpot. For example, when the timing for resetting the prefetch big win flag is reset when the variable display subject to the notice is finished, it is possible to make a prefetch determination for the start win won during the big win game. The prefetching notice effect based on the prefetching determination result can be performed from when the big hit is completed.

  When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit but the data indicating the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a small hit / crash probability end designation command (S443, S444). Thereby, the small hit / probability end designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit, the big hit end 1 designation command is set (S445). Thereby, the jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to S449.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer (S154). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display timer is 0 (S155). If the jackpot end display timer is not 0, the process is terminated. If the big hit end display timer is 0, it is checked whether the type of big hit is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit (S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (S161). Then, the process proceeds to S162. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to S162. In S162, the time reduction flag is set (S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction counter (S163). As a result, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the time-saving state is always controlled. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164).

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit pre-release process in S308 is the same as the pre-big hit release process in S305, and the small hit open process in S309 is the same process as the mid-round process in S306. The small hit end process in S310 is the same process as the big hit end process in S307. However, unlike the case of the big hit end process, the probability change flag and the hourly flag are not set in the small hit end process. Therefore, at the small hit, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set / reset. When the small hit flag and the prefetch small hit flag are set, the small hit end process is reset. Note that the timing of resetting the prefetch small hit flag may be during the period from the end of the variable display to be notified to the end of the small hit. For example, when the timing for resetting the prefetch small hit flag is reset when the variable display subject to the notice is completed, the prefetch determination can be made for the start winning that was won during the small hit game. Therefore, a pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading determination result can be performed from when the small hit is completed.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 30 to 32 show display screens of the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where the fluctuation pattern is “no slip of normal fluctuation”, “no slip of one-time quasi-ream (non-reach)”, and “slip of normal fluctuation”. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9.

  When the variation pattern “no normal variation slip” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, as shown in FIGS. 30 (C1) and (C2), a special effect is not executed. When the variation pattern of “with normal variation slip” is designated, the “slip” effect as shown in FIGS. 30E1 to 30E4 is executed. When the fluctuation pattern of “no one-time quasi-ream (non-reach) slip” is designated, the “pseudo-ream” is not performed without executing the “slip” effects as shown in FIGS. 30D1 to 30D6. The production is executed. 30 (D1) to 30 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30A, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to, for example, the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern is that the “slip” effect is executed, the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. "Slip" is performed.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then “ After the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (D2), the effect symbol “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), so that the pseudo consecutive chance GC6 shown in FIG. 6 is obtained. The production symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the first time variation is completed.

  If the type of variation pattern is slippage due to pseudo-continuous, the effect symbol “6” is once stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9R of “right” immediately before the display state of FIG. After a temporary stop display) is performed and an effect as if it does not develop into a pseudo-ream is performed, an effect of “slip” is performed, and an effect of setting the display state as shown in FIG. 30 (D1) is performed. It is. Note that a plurality of types of such “slip” effects may be provided. For example, a pattern that performs a “slip” effect after stopping a symbol that does not reach, or a stop effect symbol that is stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L after the right symbol is stopped becomes an opportunity. Includes a pattern that produces a combination to obtain. When the variation pattern type is pseudo-continuous and slips, a “slip” production pattern selected from the plurality of types is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (D3), the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and the change is performed again. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the “slip” effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in FIG. 30 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 30 (E1), the effect symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 30). 50). After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 31 to FIG. 32 are explanatory diagrams showing display operation examples when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which a “slip” effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 31 (C1) to (C3), the symbol display areas 9L and 9R for “left” and “right” are displayed. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect symbol is changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed so that the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. An effect display for changing the effect design is performed. Further, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which a “pseudo-continuous” effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 31 (D1) to (D5), the effect symbols are displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. After the temporary stop display, the effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-continuous change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), so that the variation display state of the effect symbols becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 31 (C3) and FIG. 31 (D5), as shown in FIG. 32 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern type is normal reach or the like, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), symbols indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are displayed as “left” and “right”. A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 32B, in response to the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, but the fluctuation display result is “out”. 32G, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (G), an effect image indicating that the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C is displayed, and then “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol of the number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the effect symbol variation display.

  Also, when Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 32C, the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, which has been reduced, increases again. Various reach effects are displayed.

  In the reach effect of super reach 1, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 32D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  Further, in the reach effect of Super Reach 2, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 32 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 32 (F) proceeds. Then, as shown in FIGS. 32 (G) and (H), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 32 (H), as shown in FIG. 32 (I), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second stage effect display (temporary stop display) appears. . When the variation display result is “out of”, the displayed effect symbols are not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-off combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variation display is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol process (S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (CPU 56) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (S1211), the CPU 56 executes a gate switch passage process (S1212). Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in S1200 to S1203 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (S1212): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (S1200): The CPU 56 can start the normal symbol variation (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating S100, specifically, the normal symbol indicator) 10, when the variable symbol display is not displayed and the variable symbol ball apparatus 15 is not in the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball device 15 based on the symbol being derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), Check the value of. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (S1201).

  Normal symbol variation processing (S1201): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10, and causes the normal symbol process timer to detect the normal symbol. Set the stop time and start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (S1202).

  Normal symbol stop process (S1202): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S1200). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (when the short time flag is set), and if it is a high base state, the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the high base state is determined. If the opening pattern is selected and the low base state (when the short time flag is not set), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the low base state is selected and the selected opening pattern is set. To do. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (S1203).

  Ordinary electric accessory actuating process (S1203): The CPU 56 is based on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, and the number of game balls won (second start prize) in the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15). The number of winnings to the mouth 14) is counted, and the ordinary electric winnings are counted with the set opening pattern (the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball device 15 is performed). The normal electric accessory release pattern process is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S1200).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (S1200). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (S1221). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in S1221), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in S1221), the CPU 56 reads the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Store (S1222). Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (S1223). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the normal design random number (random 5) from the random number storage buffer (S1224), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (S1225). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 5) matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit. For example, when the hour / short flag is set, that is, in the high base state (time / short state), the hit determination value is any one of 1 to 10, and in the low base state, the hit determination value is 3 or 7. If the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 10, the winning probability in the high base state is 10/11, and the winning probability in the low base state is 2/11. As described above, the hit is made with a high probability in the high base state, and the win is made only with a low probability in the low base state.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol process timer (S1226), and starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (S1227). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of low base is 30.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol at the time of high base is 1.0 seconds. . Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (S1201) (S1228).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S1201). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S1231). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S1231), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S1235).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in S1231), the CPU 56 stops the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 (S1232). Then, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol stop time in the normal symbol process timer (S1233). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (S1202) (S1234).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (S1202). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has expired (S1241). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S1241), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S1242).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (Y in S1241), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (whether or not it is determined to be a winning symbol in S1225). Whether or not) is confirmed (S1243). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol can be confirmed, for example, by setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in S1225, and whether or not the flag is set. .

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in S1243), the CPU 56 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (S1244). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate. The normal electric accessory operating time is set to be longer in the high base state than in the low base state.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S1245).

  When the time reduction flag is set (in the high base state) (Y in S1245), the CPU 56 sets the release pattern set in the high base time table shown in the lower part of FIG. Is selected (S1246). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is not set (when it is in the low base state) (N in S1245), the CPU 56 is set in the low base time table shown in the upper part of FIG. An open pattern is selected (S1247). In the example shown in FIG. 37, in the low base time table, an opening pattern data with an opening time of 0.5 seconds and an opening count of 1 is set. Also, in the high base time table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 2 is set.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the release pattern selected in S1246 or S1247 in the release pattern buffer (S1248). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set) is added to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). The process of setting the closing time until the first opening is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (S1203) (S1249).

  In S1243, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in S1243), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (S1200). (Specifically, “0”) (S1250).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory operating process (S1203). In the normal electric accessory actuating process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (S1261). This normal symbol process timer is the normal electric accessory operating time set in S1244 described above. If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in S1261), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (S1262).

  Then, the CPU 56 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (S1263). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The CPU 56 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (S1264). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in S1264), the process proceeds to S1268. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in S1264), the second start port switch 14a is turned on, so the CPU 56 connects the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15). The ordinary electric accessory winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls is incremented by one (S1265). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory winning number counter is less than 8 (S1266). When the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in S1266), that is, when it is 8 or more, the CPU 56 clears the value of the ordinary symbol process timer (to 0) (S1267). In S1267, the value of the normal symbol process timer is cleared (to 0), and the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is closed. With such a process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process ends (see S1261, Y, S1272). As described above, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric player operating process is terminated and the variable winning ball device is finished. 15 is closed. When eight or more game balls have won the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the value of the normal symbol process timer is cleared (to 0) in S1267 and the normal electric accessory ( After the variable winning ball apparatus 15) is closed, the normal electric accessory actuating process may be terminated, and the process proceeds to S1272 through the next S1261 but may proceed directly to S1272.

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (S1268). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (S1269). If not timed out (N in S1269), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in S1269), the CPU 56 sets the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer (S1270). Then, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (S1271).

  Specifically, when the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the release time is set as the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer ( The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of the solenoid buffer. When the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, a closing time is set as an open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  Through the processes in S1268 to S1271, the open pattern in the low base state and the open pattern in the high base state are realized. When the gaming state is in the low base state, the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is one, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds from the start of the normal electric accessory operation process When the closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 0.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is two. When the second closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed.

  In S1261, when the normal symbol process timer (ordinary electric accessory operating time set in S1244) has expired (Y in S1261), the CPU 56 performs normal symbol normal processing (S1200) on the value of the normal symbol process flag. The value is updated (specifically “0”) (S1272).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the effect control process of S704 to S710.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a command analysis process for setting a flag according to the received effect control command (S704). Next, on the basis of the received command, a hold storage process for storing information similar to the hold specific area in FIG. 19A in the RAM is performed (S705). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c (S706). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S707). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S708). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S709). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Furthermore, a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining the aspect of the effect or the like is executed (S710). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  40 and 41 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). Note that when read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command receiving buffer, for example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 14) among the predetermined commands is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result designation command (any one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S624). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / accuracy start designation command (S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / accuracy start designation command reception flag (S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S630).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S642). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (S648).

  If the received effect control command is a start prize designation command (S649), the effect control CPU 101 stores the start prize designation command in the start prize designation command storage area formed in the RAM, and holds display processing. 1 is added to the unprocessed number counter indicating the number of start winnings that have not yet been made (S650). As will be described later, on-hold is added and displayed based on the value of the unprocessed number counter.

  When the received effect control command is not the start winning designation command but the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (C300 in FIG. 14) (S651), the production control CPU 101 subtracts and updates the hold display. 1 is added (S652). Based on the value of the hold subtraction counter, the hold is subtracted and displayed as described later (see S669 to S671).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing corresponding to the received effect control command (S653), and proceeds to S611. The corresponding process is, for example, a process for setting a flag corresponding to the received command. Further, as a corresponding process, if the received effect control command is a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a process of adding 1 to a hold subtraction counter for subtracting and updating the hold display is applicable. As will be described later, the hold is subtracted and displayed based on the value of the hold subtraction counter.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the specific control contents of the hold storage process in S705. The effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the unprocessed number counter is equal to or greater than “1” (S594). This unprocessed number counter is incremented by “1” in S650 every time a start winning designation command is received, and is decremented by “1” every time S660 to S667 of the hold memory display control process (FIG. 57) described later is executed. Is. If the unprocessed number counter is not “1” or more, the process proceeds to S601. If it is “1” or more, the process number counter is incremented by “1” (S595) and stored in the start winning designation command storage area. It is determined whether or not the start winning designation command is the first starting winning designation command (S569). This start prize designation command is stored in the start prize designation command storage area in S650, and the first start prize designation or the second start prize designation transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is the start prize designation command. Stored in the storage area. If it is the first start winning designation command, a process of storing “first” (00) in the effect side reserved specific area formed in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S597). The effect side reserved specific area has eight storage areas in the same manner as the reserved specific area described with reference to FIG. 19A (see FIG. 43). Each storage area has a storage capacity of 2 bits. Then, the production-side reserved storage specifying information indicating “first” or “second” is stored in the order of reception of the start winning designation command. This presentation-side reserved storage specifying information is composed of 2-bit data. When the upper bit is “1”, it indicates “first”, and when the upper bit is “0”, it indicates “second”. . As will be described later, when the low-order bit is “1”, this indicates that the production-side reserved storage specifying information is designated as the target of the prefetching notice (see S666), and when the low-order bit is “0”. Indicates that the production-side reserved storage specifying information is not designated as the target of the prefetch notice.

  If the determination result in S596 is the second start winning designation command, a process of storing “second” (10) in the effect side reserved specific area is performed (S598). Next, it is determined whether the unprocessed number counter and the processed number counter are equal (S599). Normally, the pending storage process is executed in a state where the start winning designation command is received once, so the value of the unprocessed number counter is “1”, and the values of the unprocessed number counter and the processed number counter are Are determined to be equal to each other, and the process proceeds to S600. However, when a game ball is won at the same time at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the value of the unprocessed number counter is “2”, and NO is determined at S599, and S595 to S599. Repeat the process once again. In preparation for the continuous reception of two start winning designation commands accompanying the simultaneous start winning, the start winning designation command storage area can store two start winning designation commands.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears (initializes) the processing number counter to “0” (S600).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold subtraction counter is equal to or greater than “1” (S601). This hold subtraction counter is incremented by “1” in S652 when a hold memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted. When the hold subtraction counter is “1” or more, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process of erasing and shifting the stored data of the effect side hold specific area stored in the RAM. At that time, as described above, since the variable display based on the second reserved storage data is executed with priority, it is necessary to erase the second reserved storage data with priority.

  Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether “second” (00 or 01) is stored in the effect-side reserved specific area in the RAM (S602). If “second” is stored, the oldest stored data of “second” is deleted, and the content of the production side reserved specific area is shifted in the direction of the deleted area. This is performed (S603). On the other hand, when “second” is not stored in the production-side reserved specific area, that is, when all are “first” (10 or 11), the oldest stored data (“first” data) is stored. A process of erasing and shifting the contents of the production side reserved specific area in the direction of the erased area is performed (S604).

  As a result of such hold storage processing, the same data as the data stored in the hold specific area of FIG. 19A is stored in the effect side hold specific area in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100. It becomes.

  The effect side reserved specific area is shown in FIG. In the effect side reserved specific area formed in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (8) of the reserved memory counter is secured. This storage area stores presentation side hold storage specifying information for specifying whether the generated start prize is the first start prize or the second start prize. This stored information is determined according to the first start winning designation command (C0xx) and the second starting winning designation command (C1xx) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. The reserved memory counter counts the number of start winning prizes that have not yet been used for variable display among the generated start winning prizes, and is incremented by “1” by S666 and S667, which will be described later, and decremented by “1” by S671. Is done.

  FIG. 43A shows the case where the value of the reserved memory counter is “5”, and the first (10), first, (10), 2nd (00), 1st (10), 2nd (00) production side hold storage specific information is stored. A 2-bit storage area is secured in each area of the production-side reserved specific area. When the upper bit is “1”, “first” is specified, and when the upper bit is “0”, “second” is specified. Is done. The low-order bit is a bit indicating whether or not the production-side reserved storage specifying information is designated as a target of the pre-reading notice. When the low-order bit is “1”, the production-side reserved storage specifying information is When it is designated as the target of the prefetching advance notice and the lower bit is “0”, it indicates that the production side reserved storage specifying information is not designated as the subject of the prefetching notice.

  FIG. 43B shows a case where the reserved memory counter is “6”, and in particular, the second (01) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the reserved memory counter “6”. This is because the lower-order bit is “1”, and therefore it is specified that the production-side reserved storage specifying information is designated as the target of the pre-reading notice.

  (C) in FIG. 43 shows a case where the hold memory counter is “4”. From the state of (B), the variable display is executed twice without any start winning, and the effect side hold memory specification is performed. A state in which two pieces of information are erased is shown. As described above, the second (00) information stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory counter “3” in FIG. First, it is deleted, and each stage-side reserved storage specifying information of the reserved memory counters “4”, “5”, and “6” is shifted by one to the deleted storage area side, and then the reserved memory counter “ The “second (00)” presentation side hold storage specific information stored in the storage area corresponding to “4” is deleted, and the “second (01)” presentation side hold storage is stored in the deleted storage area side. Specific information is shifted. This state is shown in FIG.

  In the state of (C) of FIG. 43, the production-side reserved storage specifying information used for the next variable display is “second (01)” stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory counter “4”. For this reason, the variable display based on the production-side reserved storage specifying information that is the prefetch target is started.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the light is alternately turned on every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 44A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 44B).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol for sliding. SR3, random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change, random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of second pseudo change, random number SR7 for determining the notice type, appearance character of the pseudo continuous notice The random number SR8 for determination, the random number SR9 for determining the appearance character of the hit notice, and the random number SR10 for determining the background are used. The random numbers SR1-1 to SR10 are cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and are extracted at a timing determined for each.

  Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect. In addition, although the example in which the upper limit values of the random numbers related to the notice effect such as SR7 to SR9 are all the same has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper limit values of SR7 to SR10 may be set differently. Further, the upper limit value of each of SR7 to SR10 may be set to be a prime number. In this way, the execution mode of the notice effect can be determined by different distributions.

  The random number SR3 for determining the slip temporary stop symbol may be used for all or part of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” when performing the “slip” effect (this implementation) Is a random number used to determine a production symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R).

  Next, the random number SR4-1 of the pseudo-continuous first variation temporary stop symbol and the random number SR4-2 of the pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, a combination of effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed is determined using a value extracted from either random number SR4-1 or random number SR4-2 according to the remaining number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. .

  The pseudo-random first variation temporary stop symbol random number SR4-1 is a random number used to determine an effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the first variation.

  The pseudo-random second-change temporary stop symbol random number SR4-2 is a random number used to determine an effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the first re-variation started after the end of the first change. .

  In addition, the effect symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped in the second re-variation that is started after the first re-variation is finished is the effect symbol to be displayed temporarily stop in the first variation or the effect symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped in the first re-variation. Is set by a predetermined random number lottery.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice type is a random number used for determining one of a plurality of kinds prepared in advance as the notice type when the notice is executed. There are multiple types of notice types, such as a pseudo-annual notice that pretends to be a pseudo-ream, a pre-announcement that predicts a success, a false notice and a button notice as a notice different from the successful notice, and a step-up notice. Is provided. The notice effect is selected and executed from a plurality of types.

  The reason for selecting and executing one notice effect from a plurality of types of notice effects is as follows. When multiple types of notice effects are executed at the same time, the display timing and the display location (display area) overlap, and the effects are messed up by overlapping display. In order to prevent this from being messy, one notice effect selected from a plurality of types of notice effects is executed as the notice effect. In addition, by selecting a notice effect to be executed from a plurality of types of notice effects, it is possible to facilitate design change of the occurrence ratio of the notice effect with respect to the notice effect control. Further, since it is only necessary to execute the process of determining the effect mode for the selected type of the notice effect, the processing amount of the control program related to the notice effect can be reduced.

  As described above, any one of pseudo-continuous notice, hit notice, button notice, and step-up notice is executed as the notice effect. In addition, the notice effect is not limited to this, and whether the pseudo-continuous notice, the hit notice, the button notice, and the step-up notice are separately provided and executed as separate notices executed at different timings or in different display areas. You may make it judge separately.

  The pseudo-continuous notice refers to an effect of causing a character to appear that the pseudo-ream is executed. Winning notice refers to an effect of causing a character to appear to win. The button notice is an effect that displays a predetermined message on the condition that the operation button is operated during the variable display. Step-up notice refers to an effect that steps up the notice form in a plurality of stages. In the step-up notice, the reliability of the big hit (reach) differs depending on the number of steps to be stepped up. The number of stages is set to be different depending on the type of the notice pattern to be selected.

  The notice effect is a pre-read notice effect executed during the variable display based on the hold memory stored prior to the hold memory subject to the notice, and a normal notice effect executed during the variable display subject to the notice. Including.

  The pre-reading notice effect is for a predetermined period of time at a predetermined timing in a variable display based on each of a holding memory to be notified and a holding memory (hereinafter also referred to as a notice execution holding memory) stored before the holding memory. Executed. For example, when three hold memories are stored prior to the hold memory to be notified, the pre-reading notice effect is performed in four variable displays based on the three hold memories and the hold memory to be notified.

  In the case where pseudo-variable display is executed as the variable display based on the pre-announcement pending storage, the preliminary announcement is performed at a predetermined timing at a predetermined period in each of the initial variation of the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation started after the first variation. Executed. For this reason, for example, when a pseudo-continuous notice is performed as a pre-reading notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice can be performed in each variable display started before the variable display to be notified. Furthermore, after entering the pseudo-ream in the variable display to be notified, it is possible to make a pre-announcement for the number of times corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-ream continues to continue the pseudo-ream. As a result, it is possible to perform pseudo continuous notice over a variable display count that is larger than the total upper limit number (for example, 8) of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if a preliminary announcement is being made for the previous variable display exceeding the total upper limit number of reserved memories, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, there is a case where pseudo-variable display is performed before the start of variable display to be subjected to pseudo-continuous notice. In this case, in addition to the variable display to be notified, the pseudo continuous notification can be performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo continuous in the pseudo continuous variable display started before that. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the subject of the notice is a variable display that far exceeds the total upper limit, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  The normal notice effect is executed for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing during the variable display to be a target of the notice. When the variation display is a pseudo-continuous, the initial variation of the pseudo-continuous and each variation started after the initial variation are executed over a predetermined period at a predetermined timing. For example, in the pseudo-continuous variation display, the normal announcement effect is performed for each of the first variation and the re-variation started after the first variation.

  The random number SR8 for determining the appearance character of the pseudo-continuous notice is a random number used to determine the type of character that appears in the pseudo-continuous notice. The random number SR9 for determining the appearance character of the hit notice is a random number used for determining the type of character to appear in the hit notice.

  When the notice type determined based on the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice type is the pseudo-continuous notice, the notice pattern is determined based on the value of the random number SR8 for determining the appearance character of the pseudo-continuous notice. When the notice type determined based on the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice type is a hit notice, the notice pattern is determined based on the value of the random number SR9 for determining the appearance character of the hit notice. In addition, when the notice type determined based on the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice type is a button notice and a step-up notice, a predetermined random number is omitted as in the case of the pseudo-announcement and the hit notice. The notice pattern is determined based on the value of.

  The background determination random number SR10 is a random number used for determining the background type of the effect display device 9 when the notice effect is executed. In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation in which the notice effect is executed, the change display including the notice effect is performed by changing to the selected background image.

Next, a specific example of the notice executed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the prefetching notice effect is executed as an example of the notice effect. In FIG. 46, a display state when a hit notice and a pseudo-continuous notice are executed as a prefetch notice effect will be described.

  In FIG. 46 (A), in response to the stoppage of the special symbol, the fixed effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Indicates a state in which is terminated.

  FIG. 46 (B) corresponds to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol, etc. In all of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” The state where the fluctuation has started is shown.

  FIG. 46 (C) shows a state in which the start display is won during the fluctuation started in FIG. 46 (B) and the hold display is added. In FIG. 46C, it is displayed that there are three reserved memories. Note that the hold display added in FIG. 46C is displayed in a different mode (notice mode, for example, black circle) from the normal mode (for example, white circle) of the stored display already stored. This indicates that the pre-reading notice is performed for the hold memory displayed in a different mode from the normal mode, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 46D, in response to the suspension of the special symbol, the fixed effect symbol is stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Indicates a state in which is terminated.

  46 (E1) and 46 (E2), when the effect symbol newly started in response to the start of the change of the special symbol is changing, and the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. In addition, the display state when the previous notice is executed as the pre-reading notice is shown. In both FIGS. 46E1 and 46E, a hit notice is executed by the appearance of a character having a placard with a message “may be hit in memory”.

  Note that the type of character that appears in the hit notice in FIG. 46 (E1) is different from that in (E2). The type of the appearing character is selected according to the hit type as will be described later with reference to FIG. In the hitting notice, an effect of causing the character shown in FIG. 46 (E1) or the character shown in (E2) to appear. Thereby, it can be notified that the win is made from the stage before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory to be notified.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the variable display subject to the notice is displayed, or when the normal notice effect is executed, a placard with a different message such as “Maybe” is given as a winning notice. You may make it appear.

  46 (F1) and 46 (F2), when the effect symbol newly started in response to the start of the change of the special symbol is changing and the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. The display state when the pseudo continuous notice is executed as the prefetch notice is shown. In FIGS. 46 (F1) and 46 (F2), the pseudo-continuous notice is executed when a character having a placard with a message such as “May have pseudo-continuous in memory” appears.

  46 (F1) and the simulated continuous notice in (F2) differ in the types of characters that appear. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 65A, the type of the character that appears is selected according to the type of the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series. In the pseudo-continuous notice, an effect of causing the character shown in FIG. 46 (F1) or the character shown in (F2) to appear is performed. Thereby, it can be notified that the quasi-continuation is established from the stage before the start of the variable display based on the reserved storage to be notified.

  In addition, at least in the change display based on the hold storage to be notified, the change is executed a plurality of times. For this reason, it is possible to perform the pseudo continuous notice over the number of times of variable display that is larger than the total upper limit number (for example, 8) of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if a preliminary announcement is being made for the previous variable display exceeding the total upper limit number of reserved memories, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the variable display subject to the notice is displayed, or when the normal notice effect is executed, a different message such as “It may be in the pseudo-group” is written as a pseudo-continuous notice. A character with a placard may appear.

  46 (G1) and 46 (G2) are diagrams for explaining a modification example of the hit notice. In the case where a hit announcement is made and the hit type is any of 16R probability variation A to 16R probability variation C, the hit announcement is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 46 (G1) and (G2). May be a hit other than 16R probability variation A to 16R probability variation C, a hit announcement may be made in the manner shown in FIGS. 46 (E1) and (E2). In both FIGS. 46G1 and 46G, the 16R probability change notice is executed when a character having a placard with a message “Maybe there is a chance bonus in memory” appears. .

  Note that the types of characters appearing differ between the 16R probability change notice in FIG. 46 (G1) and the 16R probability change notice in (G2). Depending on the type of character, the reliability of which of the 16R probability variations A to C will be different. In other words, the 16R probability variation A is notified according to the character type. In the 16R probability change notice, an effect of causing the character shown in FIG. 46 (G1) or the character shown in (G2) to appear is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the 16R probability change hits from the stage before the start of the variable display based on the reserved storage to be notified.

  When the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the variable display subject to the notice is displayed, or when the normal notice effect is executed, a different message such as “Maybe a chance bonus” is written as a 16R probability change notice. A character with a card may appear.

  Note that, as described above, the pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the variable display based on the hold memory to be noticed.

  47 and 48 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the normal notice effect is executed as an example of the notice effect. In FIG. 47, a display state when a button notice is executed as a normal notice effect will be described. FIG. 48 illustrates a display state when a step-up notice is executed as the normal notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 47, as shown in (A) and (B), “left”, “middle”, “right” Variations in the production symbols are started in all of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is decided to execute the button advance notice, as shown in (C), an image showing an envelope (hereinafter, envelope) in a changing state where the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. 9P is displayed, an image indicating an operation button (hereinafter referred to as an operation button image) 9Q, and an image indicating an operation request message “Please press the button” (hereinafter referred to as an operation request message image) 9S Is displayed. The display of the envelope image 9P, the operation button image 9Q, and the operation request message image 9S is executed to prompt the player to operate the operation button 30. Hereinafter, the display of the envelope image 9P, the operation button image 9Q, and the operation request message image 9S is referred to as a button operation promotion effect.

  Among the button operation promotion effects, the envelope image 9P is selected by selecting the color of the envelope according to the ratio of winning or pseudo-continuous after the button notice effect (for example, “first color display (white)”, “second” In order of “color display (blue)” and “third color display (yellow)”, the color is shown to indicate that the reliability (hereinafter also simply referred to as “reliability”) after hitting the button is high. When selected (the relationship of reliability is first color display <second color display <third color display)), the display showing the reliability of the big hit is performed. Thereby, since the reliability is indicated by the color of the envelope before the button notice is given, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the operation of the operation button 30 by the player can be promoted. Such a display showing the reliability is called a color reliability display.

  Note that an example has been described in which the reliability is notified after the button notification by the color of the envelope image 9P. However, the reliability may be notified by the mode of the button operation promotion effect after the button notification, for example, may be notified by the size, type, shape, etc. of the envelope image 9P. Of the operation promotion effects, not only the mode of the envelope image 9P but also the mode of the operation button image 9Q or the operation request message image 9S, or the combination of the modes of the envelope image 9P, the operation button image 9Q, and the operation request message image 9S. You may notify.

  The period from the start to the end of the button operation promotion effect is an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. And if operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped as shown in FIG. An announcement is made that a winning or pseudo-continuation is made in any one of the plurality of types of effects. Specifically, the envelope image 9P is opened, and an effect is shown in which a notice message written on the document as the contents is displayed. As a plurality of types of production modes, a plurality of production modes with different notice messages written in the document are determined in advance, and any one of these production modes is selected, and the notice message according to the selected production mode Is displayed.

  The notice message includes, for example, the messages “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK”, and any one message is selected. Is displayed. The notification message has a selection ratio set so that the ratio of winning or pseudo-ream after the notification effect is different. In this embodiment, the degree of the ratio of winning or pseudo-relation in the variable display based on the reserved storage that is the subject of the advance notice is called the reliability. For example, the other notice messages are set with higher reliability than the notice message “...”. In addition, the notice messages “high heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” are set with higher reliability than “CHANCE”. Further, “REACH” is set to be selectable only when reaching after the notice effect. In addition, “FEVER” is set so that it can be selected only when a big hit occurs after the notice effect. As shown in (C) and (D), the button notice as the first notice effect is performed using a relatively wide display area of the effect display device 9.

  As described above, in the button notice, when the player operates the operation button 30, the notice message corresponding to the reliability is displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  After the display of the button notice as shown in (D) is finished, as shown in (F), in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, Display control is performed so as to be in a stop state (when re-change remains) or a complete stop state (when last change).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period, the display relating to the button notice as in (D) is not performed, and as shown in (E) and (F), The variation display is continued in the display mode, and the display control is performed so that the effect symbol is in a temporarily stopped state (when re-variation still remains) or a complete stop state (when it is the last variation).

  Next, referring to FIG. 48, as shown in (A) and (B), “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol, etc. The change of the effect symbol is started in all of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. When it is determined to execute the step-up notice, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (D), a plurality of stages are displayed in the changing state where the effect symbols are not stopped in any symbol display area. A notice composed of these steps is executed.

  Specifically, in the step-up notice, a notice indicating that it will be a hit or a pseudo-ream is divided into a plurality of steps (for example, three steps of Step 1 to Step 3). As for the step-up notice, the three notice steps of Step 1 to Step 3 are executed to the maximum in each change display (including the initial change and each re-change in the pseudo series). For each of the notice steps from Step 1 to Step 3, images (hereinafter referred to as character images) 91T, 92T, and 93T showing three humanoid characters having different colors are prepared.

  In principle, the step-up notice is a step 1 in which the first character image 91T with the first color (for example, black) is displayed, and the second with the second color (for example, green). Display in a manner that steps up in multiple steps according to the order of step 2 in which the character image 92T is displayed and step 3 in which the third character image 93T with a third color (for example, red) is displayed. Is done. Therefore, for example, each time the advance notice step is stepped up, the character image is switched and displayed.

  For Step 1 to Step 3 constituting the step-up notice, the reliability is set so that the ratio of hits or pseudo-continuations when displayed is higher in the order of Step 1 <Step 2 <Step 3. ing. As a result, from the viewpoint of the player, there is a high ratio of subsequent hits or pseudo-continuations when displayed in the order of first character image 91T <second character image 92T <third character image 93T. The reliability is set so that

  As shown in FIG. 48B, in step 1, which is the first step in the step-up notice, the first character image 91T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Then, in Step 2, which is the second step in the step-up notice, as shown in (C), the second character image 92T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen). Further, in step 3, which is the third step in the step-up notice, as shown in (D), the third character image 93T is displayed (for example, appears from the end of the screen).

  As described above, in step-up notice, character images of different colors may be sequentially displayed in all of steps 1 to 3.

  In addition, the character image displayed in each step of the step-up notice has a plurality of types of patterns in which selection ratios are set so that the ratio of winning or pseudo-continuity in the variable display based on the reserved memory to be noticed is different. (For example, “first pattern display (solid painting)”, “second pattern display (striped pattern)”, and “third pattern display (spotted pattern)”). In order, the pattern display is selected so as to indicate that the reliability of winning or pseudo-ream is high after the basic development notice (the relationship between the reliability of winning or pseudo-reliability is the first pattern display <second pattern display < In this way, in the basic advance notice, a pattern corresponding to the reliability level is attached to the character image at each step and displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved. .

  Then, when a big hit occurs after the notice effect, as shown in (E), all character images displayed during the variable display are displayed when the last variable display is performed (for example, from the end of the screen). To appear). As for the step-up notice, a fourth step (step 4) for performing display as shown in (E) may be provided as the notice step.

  As described above, in the step-up notice, the character image is displayed in such a manner that the reliability is stepped up every time the variable display is performed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, the notice types are the hit notice shown in FIGS. 46 (E1), (E2), (G1), and (G2), the pseudo-continuous notice shown in FIGS. 46 (F1) and (F2), FIG. Button notices shown in (C) and (D) and step-up notices shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (E) are provided. When the notice effect is executed, one notice type is selected from the plurality of kinds, and the notice effect is executed as the pre-read notice effect or the normal notice effect described above.

  46 to 48, the background image is not shown. However, when the notice effect is executed, the selected type of background image is displayed. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the types of background images displayed when the notice effect is executed. The type of background image is selected according to the type of reach, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 49A is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the background A. FIG. When the background A is selected, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the mode is changed to a sea mode (a mode for displaying an image reminiscent of the sea (for example, fish, seaweed, water, etc.)).

  FIG. 49B is a diagram for describing a display mode of the background B. When the background B is selected, as shown in FIG. 49B, the mode is changed to a mountain mode (a mode for displaying an image reminiscent of a mountain (for example, a mountain, a bird, a cloud, or the like)).

  FIG. 49C is a diagram for describing a display mode of the background C. When the background C is selected, as shown in FIG. 49C, the mode is changed to a night sky mode (a mode for displaying an image reminiscent of the night sky (for example, a moon, a star, etc.)).

  In the case of the pre-reading notice effect, the variable display based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice ends (except for the period during which the reach effect is executed) after the variable display in which the prefetch notice effect is executed is started. ), The background of the selected type is displayed. Further, in the case of the normal notice effect, the background of the selected type is displayed from the start of the current variable display to the end thereof (except for the period during which the reach effect is executed).

  Next, a table used when determining a stop symbol will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a final stop symbol determination table when non-reach is lost. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of a left / right outcome determination table. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a final stop symbol determination table at the time of reach failure. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a final stop symbol determination table at the time of big hit.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the final stop symbol determination shown in FIGS. 50A to 50C is used as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach deviation combination. Tables 160A-160C are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 50A is a final left symbol that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach deviations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 50 (B) is the final right symbol that becomes the finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach deviations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 50C is a final final symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach deviations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right appearance determination table 161 as shown in FIG. In the left / right outcome determination table 161, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to any of LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. And a data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 50B, the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is not assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design can be prevented from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination.

  In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 50C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is not assigned. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that is a combination of the determined effect symbols. For example, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, a portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 6 or a combination of specific non-reach deviations similar to the chance eyes (for example, “221”, “ 332 ”etc.) is not assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. With this assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a specific non-reach similar to the chance. It is possible to avoid a combination of outliers.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, a final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 52 is used as a table for determining a final effect symbol that is a combination of reach deviation. include.

  The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 52 includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the determined effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. The right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, is referred to based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same rendering symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2).

  As shown in FIG. 12B, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the reach deviation combination is identified by the number of deviation frames between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol identified from the variation pattern. That is, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, which is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, is determined from the effect symbols of the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, It will be determined to be the production design. For example, when the effect symbols of the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 are determined to be “8” and the number of shift frames specified from the variation pattern is “5”, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 “3” may be determined as the effect design.

  The determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A, 163B, and 163C shown in FIG. 53 as tables for determining a definite effect combination that is a jackpot combination. include. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 53 (A) is a stop display in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as a definite effect symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation big hit symbol. This is a table that is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 53 (B) is stopped in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as a definite effect symbol that becomes a 15R non-probable big hit symbol. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 53 (C) is a left and right final stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R as a definite effect symbol that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit symbol. It is a table referred in order to determine FZ3-1 and FZ3-2 based on random number SR1-1 for 1st last stop symbol determination.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the same as the left and right final stop symbols FZ3-1 and FZ3-3. It includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols.

  In addition, as the final effect symbol which becomes the 16R probability variation big hit symbol, the middle final stop symbol FZ3-2 which is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is displayed only when the 16R probability variation big hit becomes “CB”. "The symbol is decided.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display operation when the variation display result is “16R probability variation big hit”. 54A and 54B, for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol. In all of the above, the production design changes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54C, the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and “right” in the symbol display area 9R as shown in FIG. The effect symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed, and the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. In the reach state, as shown in FIG. 54E, a message such as “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state is reached.

  In the reach state, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. Then, when the type of the variation pattern is normal reach, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 (G), after the number “6” is temporarily displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, As shown in FIG. 54H, an effect of dropping the “CB” symbol from above is performed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, and “CB” is displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C as shown in FIG. The symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. In this way, a combination in which the left and right symbols are the same and the middle symbol is “CB” is set as the symbol combination for 16R probability variation big hit. After the symbol combination for 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), a message such as “chance bonus” is displayed to notify that 16R probability variation big hit has been reached.

  The example in which the symbol combinations for 15R jackpot and 16R jackpot are randomly determined based on the values extracted from SR1-1 has been described with reference to FIGS. Similarly, 2R probability variation big hit and small hit symbol combinations are randomly determined from a plurality of specific symbol combinations (for example, 135, 139, etc.) based on the values extracted from SR1-1 and the like. You may comprise. In addition, the symbol combination that becomes the 2R probability variation big hit and the small hit may be configured to be determined at random based on the values extracted from SR1-1 to SR1-3, similarly to the case of non-reach.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of pseudo continuous execution. In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 55 (FIG. 55 () Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in A) to (C) are included.

  In each temporary stop symbol determination table 167A to 167C, when the effect of “pseudo train” is executed, the variation pattern is 1 pseudo train (non-reach), 1 pseudo train a, 1 pseudo train b, special 1 Or a special one-time pseudo-series b (hereinafter also referred to collectively as a one-time pseudo-series), a two-time pseudo-series a, a two-time pseudo-series b, a three-time pseudo-series a, 3 Is the one-time pseudo-ream b, the special 2-time pseudo-ream a, the special 2-time pseudo-ream b, the special 3-times pseudo-ream a, or the special 3-times pseudo-ream b (hereinafter collectively referred to as a multiple-time pseudo-ream)? Or, it is selected as a use table according to the number of times of change.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A is a table for determining the temporary variation symbol of the initial variation when the type of variation pattern is the aforementioned one-time pseudo-continuation. When the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A is referred to, according to the determination value determined according to the left last stop symbol, the random number SR4-1 of the temporary stop symbol temporary change symbol of the pseudo continuous first chance GC1 to GC8. The pseudo consecutive chance to which the value extracted from 1 belongs is determined as a temporary stop symbol of the first fluctuation.

  Further, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B is a table for determining the temporary stop symbol of the first variation when the type of the variation pattern is the above-described pseudo-continuous multiple times. When the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B is referred to, according to the determination value determined according to the left last stop symbol, the random number SR4-1 of the temporary stop symbol at the time of the pseudo continuous first variation among the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. The pseudo consecutive chance to which the value extracted from 1 belongs is determined as a temporary stop symbol of the first fluctuation.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C is a table for determining the temporary stop symbol of the first re-variation that is started after the initial variation is completed when the type of variation pattern is the above-described pseudo-continuous multiple times. It is. When the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C is referred to, the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 among the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 are determined according to the determination value determined according to the pseudo-continuous chance item determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The pseudo continuous chance to which the value extracted from the random number SR4-2 of the second variation temporary stop symbol belongs is determined as the temporary stop symbol of the first revariation.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a temporary stop symbol in a pseudo continuous variation. In the one-time quasi-continuation, the temporary change symbol of the first variation is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A. In the two-time quasi-continuation, a temporary stop symbol for the first change is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167B and 167C, and a temporary stop symbol for the first re-variation is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the three-time quasi-continuous, the temporary stop symbol of the first variation is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, and the first re-variation is determined using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167B and 167C. A temporary stop symbol is determined. Then, as described above, the temporary stop symbol for the second re-variation of the third pseudo-continuation is determined to be either the initial stop temporary stop symbol or the first re-change temporary stop symbol.

  In this case, it is configured so that either one of the temporary change symbol of the first fluctuation or the temporary stop symbol of the first re-variation is determined at a higher rate when the big hit is made than when the big hit is not made. Also good. Thereby, the expectation that becomes a big hit can be made different according to the combination of the temporary stop symbol of the second re-variation and the temporary stop symbol of the first change or the temporary stop symbol of the first re-variation.

  As described above, by determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, the “left”, “ The effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “medium” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process in S706. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the unprocessed number counter added in S650 is 1 or more (S660). When it is determined that the value of the unprocessed number counter is “1” or more, processing for holding display is executed.

  In S661, it is determined whether a pre-reading notice execution flag or a pre-reading notice flag is set (S661). The pre-reading notice execution flag is a flag indicating that the prefetching notice has already been executed, and is set in S679 of FIG. 63 described later. The prefetch notice flag is a flag indicating that it is determined to perform the prefetch notice effect, and is set in S665 of FIG.

  When it is determined in S661 that the pre-reading notice execution flag or the prefetching notice flag is set, the value of the hold memory counter for specifying the hold memory number is incremented by 1, and then (A) and (B) in FIG. ) Is displayed in a normal manner (for example, a white circle is displayed) (S667). Based on the value of the reserved memory counter, the reserved memory is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S661 that neither the pre-reading notice execution flag nor the pre-reading notice flag is set, the corresponding start winning designation command is a command indicating a pseudo-ream or a win (here, 16R big hit, It is determined whether the command indicates 15R jackpot (S662). Whether the start winning designation command is a command indicating a pseudo-continuation is determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern type relation of the prefetch determination result shown in FIG. 15 is a command indicating a pseudo-continuation, for example. Whether the start winning designation command is a command indicating a win is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the prefetch determination result is a command indicating a win shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in S662 that the command is neither a pseudo-ream command nor a win command, the process proceeds to S667. If it is determined in S662 that the command indicates a pseudo-ream or a win, the variation display for which variation display has not yet been started based on the production-side reserved storage identification information (see FIGS. 43A, 43B, and 43C). Processing for calculating the number of display times (the number of pre-reading notices) is performed (S663). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 uses the control-side microcomputer to store the effect-side reserved storage specific information shown in FIGS. 43A, 43B, and 43C based on the command transmitted from the main control board 560. 100 RAM (see FIG. 42). The process of S663 is performed using the production-side reserved storage specifying information (see FIGS. 43A, 43B, and 43C) stored in the RAM. For example, referring to the production-side reserved specific area in FIG. 43A, the production-side reserved storage specific information is stored as shown in the storage areas 1 to 5, for example, the second start winning prize When the start winning is made at the mouth 14, the variable display based on the second start winning is executed with priority, so the number of pre-read notices is stored in the production side reserved specific areas “3” and “5”. This is the next number of times the variable display based on the production-side reserved storage specifying information specified by “second” is executed, and becomes “3”. On the other hand, when there is a start winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display based on the hold memory specified by the effect side hold memory specifying information of all the effect side hold specifying areas of 1 to 5 ends. Therefore, the number of pre-read notices is “6”.

  In S664, it is determined whether or not the number of prefetch notices calculated in S663 is “2” or more. When it is determined that the number is 2 or more, there is a variation display in which the variation display has not yet started other than the variation display based on the current start prize, and the pre-reading notice can be executed. The lower byte data is set as a prefetch notice flag (S665). Thereby, one of the prefetch determination results shown in FIG. 15 can be specified based on the prefetch notice flag. For example, based on the pre-read notice flag, if the variation pattern type is pseudo-ream, or if it is pseudo-ream, how many times the re-variation is, whether it is a win, or if it is a win, any type It is possible to specify whether or not there is a type of reach and the like.

  When it is determined in S664 that the number is not 2 or more, that is, when the variable display resulting from the current start winning is performed next, the process proceeds to S667 in order to prevent the pre-reading notice effect.

  In S666, after adding 1 to the value of the holding memory counter, the holding display is performed in the notice mode (for example, black circle) shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. Further, in S666, a process of setting the lower bit of the production-side reserved specific area to be prefetched in advance to “1” is performed (in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory counter “6” in FIG. 43B). (See “Second (01)”). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the unprocessed number counter (S668), and the process proceeds to S660 again.

  When it is determined in S660 that the value of the unprocessed number counter is not “1” or more, that is, when the number of unprocessed items is determined to be 0, the value of the pending subtraction counter added in S651 is “1” or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S669). When it is determined that the number is not 1 or more, the hold storage display control process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the number is 1 or more, after the value of the hold memory counter is subtracted, the hold display is subtracted and updated (shifted by one) (S670). Next, the value of the hold subtraction counter is decremented by 1 (S671), and the hold storage display control process is terminated.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S707) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation of the production symbol and the decoration symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability variation promotion effect, a probability variation promotion effect is executed when a flag indicating that the probability variation promotion effect is being executed, which indicates execution of the probability variation promotion effect, is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception wait process (S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (S501). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. Note that whether or not it is determined to be out of play may be confirmed based on a change pattern command that can specify whether or not to make a big hit. If it is determined to be out of place, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation, one-time pseudo-ream (non-reach), etc.) is received as the fluctuation pattern command ( S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach deviation variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not reach (S504). In the process of S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 50A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 50B is selected as the use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 50C is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of S504, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined, thereby producing the effect symbols. Don't make the stop symbol of a combination of reach or jackpot. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the specific non-reach out-of-reach combination similar to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG.

  If it is not determined in step S501 that the game is out of place, the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the winning symbol is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 53 (S503), and the process proceeds to S516a. In the processing of S503, the final stop symbol determination table corresponding to the hit type shown in FIG. 53 is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbols FZ3-1, 2, and 3 corresponding to the winning type are determined by referring to the final stop symbol determining table corresponding to the winning type.

  If it is determined in S502 that the variation is not non-reach variation, that is, reach variation, in S505, the stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. S505) and the process proceeds to S516a. In the process of S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 52 is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect design to be the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the intermediate final stop symbol FZ2-3 determines the effect symbol which becomes the number of deviation frames specified from the effect symbol which becomes the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the variation pattern.

  As described above, in the processing of S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and finally “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. The right and left final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Next, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is the effect symbol that becomes the effect symbol that is specified from the effect symbol that becomes the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, and the variation pattern that becomes the deviation reach. It is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes an effect setting process for setting the effect pattern (S516 in FIG. 60), and executes a notice setting process for setting the notice pattern (S516a in FIG. 60). After executing the notice setting process of S516a, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (S517). The CPU 101 for effect control responds to various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the effect pattern determined by the process of S516, the notice pattern determined by the process of S516a, and the like. From among a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as a usage pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the production display during the period from the start of the production design change until the final production design that is the final stop design is stopped and displayed. Data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as effect display operation in the display area of the device 9, effect display operation in the reach effect, effect display operation in the pseudo-ream or slip effect, and effect display operation in the notice effect Are stored as a plurality of symbol variation control patterns.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series. In addition, as the symbol variation control pattern table, the symbol control pattern table including control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect symbol including the effect and the effect operation of the notice effect different from the effect operation of the effect symbol are controlled. By providing a combination of the control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect design and the control data for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect, You may comprise so that the production | presentation operation | movement similar to the case where the production | presentation operation | movement of a symbol and the production | presentation operation of a notice may be performed by one design fluctuation | variation control pattern table.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S517 (S518). Then, a process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S519).

  After performing the process of S519, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as the various parts, the various lamps as the effect parts, the speaker 27 as the effect parts, and the movable member 78 as the effect parts is started (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. In addition, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522). ).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process of S516. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is being started or is being executed, and the reserved memory (the low-order bit is “1”, the reserved-side reserved memory specifying information that is the target of the prefetch notice) )), That is, whether or not the target of the pseudo-continuous notice is the next variable display (S1551). Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is started is determined by whether or not a prefetch notice flag corresponding to the pseudo series is set. Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is being executed is determined by whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag of the pseudo continuous notice is set. Further, whether or not the display is a change display immediately before the reserved storage subject to the pre-reading notice is determined based on the information (see FIG. 19A) stored in the reserved specific area of the RAM. Is done.

  When it is determined in S1551 that the pseudo-continuous notice is started or is being executed and the subject of the notice is the next change, the type of the current fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation (non-reach) or normal reach that can be replaced by the pseudo-continuous. It is determined whether or not there is (S1552). When it is determined that the type of the current fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation (non-reach) or normal reach, the fluctuation pattern of the current design pattern is identified from the current fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation (non-reach) or normal reach. The alternative pseudo-continuous pattern that executes the pseudo-rendition with the same variation time is selected (S1553), and the process proceeds to S1556.

  As the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern having the same fluctuation time as the normal fluctuation (non-reach), there are provided a plurality of types of pseudo-continuous fluctuation patterns (for example, a one-time pseudo-continuous pattern and a two-time pseudo-continuous pattern) having different numbers of fluctuations. . Similarly, a plurality of types of pseudo-continuous variation patterns (for example, a one-time pseudo-continuous pattern and a two-time pseudo-continuous pattern) are also provided for the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern having the same variation time as the normal reach. In S1553, one alternative pseudo continuous pattern is selected from a plurality of types of alternative pseudo continuous patterns by a predetermined random number lottery. Note that when the change display to be notified is a big hit, an alternative pseudo-continuous pattern with a large number of changes may be selected with a higher probability than when the big hit is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1551 that the pseudo-continuous notice is being made and it is not determined that the subject of the notice is the next change, or in S1552, it is not determined that the type of the current change pattern is normal change (non-reach) or normal reach. Sometimes, the normal pattern specified from the variation pattern command is selected (S1553a), and the process proceeds to S1556. The normal pattern refers to, for example, a normal variation (non-reach) pattern when normal variation (non-reach) is specified from a change pattern command, and a normal reach pattern when normal reach is specified. Note that the variation display of the current effect symbol is executed with the variation pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a.

  In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous notice is started or is being executed and it is determined that the subject of the notice is the next change, the type of the current change pattern is a normal change (non-reach) or An example has been described in which the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern is selected when the normal reach is selected, and the normal pattern according to the command is selected otherwise. However, when the pseudo-continuous notice is started or is being executed and it is determined that the subject of the notice is the next fluctuation, the control method for making the fluctuation pseudo-continuous is not limited to this. It is also possible to select a street pattern and then perform the same determination process as in S1551 and S1552, and change the selected variation pattern to an alternative pseudo-continuous pattern when both are determined to be YES. Good.

  Next, in S1556, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the “slip” effect, and temporarily stops the symbol based on the extracted value of the random number SR3. To decide.

  In addition, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines the pseudo-continuous first variation temporary stop symbol determination random number SR4-1 or pseudo-continuous second in accordance with the number of times the pseudo-continuous changes. A value is extracted from the random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of change, and the combination of the temporary change symbol of the first change and each re-variation after the first change is determined with reference to the table of FIG. In the case of the “pseudo-ream” effect changed in S1553, since it becomes a pseudo-ream in the next fluctuation, the combination of the final stop symbol in addition to the temporary stop symbol combination is also determined from the pseudo-ream chance. Is done.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the pseudo-variation variation pattern (alternative pseudo-continuation pattern) that can be selected instead of normal variation (non-reach) in S1553 will be described. FIG. 62 compares the case where the variation display is performed by the normal variation (non-reach) and the case where the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern is selected instead of the normal variation (non-reach) and the variation display is performed. It is a timing chart for explaining.

  FIG. 62A is a timing chart in the case where the change display is performed by the normal change (non-reach). Timing 1 indicates the timing when the fluctuation starts. Timing 2 shows the timing when time T has elapsed from timing 1 and the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Timing 3 shows the timing when the variable display to be notified is started.

  FIG. 62 (B) is a timing chart when the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern of the one-time pseudo-continuation is selected instead of the normal variation (non-reach) and the variation display is performed. As shown between the timings 1 and 2, after the first fluctuation is performed and the chance is stopped, the second change is performed and the chance is stopped again.

  FIG. 62C is a timing chart when the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern of two pseudo-continuations is selected instead of the normal variation (non-reach) and the variation display is performed. As shown between the timings 1 and 2, the first fluctuation is performed to stop the chance, the first re-variation is performed, the chance is stopped again, and the second re-variation is performed, and then the chance. Eyes are stopped.

  In addition, when the alternative pseudo-continuous pattern is selected instead of the normal variation (non-reach) and the variation display is performed, the pre-reading advance notice flag or the pre-reading advance execution flag of the pseudo continuous notice is set. In addition, when the notice effect is executed during the pseudo-variable display, the notice effect is displayed in the initial change in the pseudo-continuity and each re-variation after the initial change, as described later in S677 or S683 of FIG. Executed. For this reason, between the timings 1 and 2, according to the number of fluctuations, the notice effect is executed once in (A), twice in (B), and three times in (C).

  Further, as shown after timing 3, since the next fluctuation becomes a pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the chance is stopped and displayed at least in the first fluctuation and the re-variation. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the fluctuation has been performed exceeding the maximum number of fluctuations (for example, three times) of the pseudo-ream, and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the notice setting process of S516a. First, it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice flag is set (S675). The prefetch notice flag is set in S665. When it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is set, the notice type is determined using a flag set notice type determination table described later (S676). In the process of S676, the value of the random number SR7 for determining the notice type is extracted, and the notice type is determined according to the table described later with reference to FIG. In S676, the notice type is determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a in FIG.

  In S677, a notice pattern corresponding to the decided notice type is determined. In the process of S677, the random number value corresponding to the notice type is extracted from the random number SR8 for determining the appearance character of the pseudo-announcement, the random number SR9 for determining the appearance character of the hit notice, and the random number SR10 for determining the background. The notice pattern corresponding to the notice type is determined in accordance with a table corresponding to the notice type among the tables described later with reference to FIG. For example, when the type of pseudo-continuous notice is determined, the values of the random number SR8 for determining the appearance character of the pseudo-continuous notice and the random number SR10 for determining the background are extracted, and the tables of (A) and (C) in FIG. Accordingly, the notice pattern corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice is determined. Further, when the type of the hit notice is determined, the values of the random number SR9 for determining the appearance character of the hit notice and the random number SR10 for determining the background are extracted and stored in the tables (B) and (C) of FIG. The notice pattern corresponding to the hit notice is determined. Note that in S677, when the variation pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a in FIG. 61 is a pseudo-continuous, the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial variation are notified by the determined notification pattern. Process data for performing the production is set. If it is decided to perform the button notice effect during the pseudo-series variation display, an operation valid period for effectively accepting the button operation is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation. Process data is set.

  In S678, the prefetch notice flag is reset. In S679, a pre-reading notice execution flag corresponding to the notice type (pseudo-continuous notice, hit notice, button notice, step-up notice) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S675 that the prefetching advance notice flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the prefetching advance execution flag set in S679 is set (S680). When it is determined that the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the same notice pattern as the previous change is determined in order to perform the same notice as the previous change display even during the present change display (S683). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect can be repeatedly executed until the variable display subject to the pre-reading notice ends. Note that in S683, when the variation pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a in FIG. 61 is a pseudo-continuous, the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial variation are notified by the determined notification pattern. Process data for performing the production is set. If it is decided to perform the button notice effect during the pseudo-series variation display, an operation valid period for effectively accepting the button operation is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation. Process data is set.

  In S684, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display based on the hold storage that is the target of the prefetch notice. As this determination method, the one whose lower-order bit is “1” among the production-side holding storage specifying information stored in the production-side holding specific area shown in FIGS. 43 (A), (B), and (C) is this time. It is determined by whether or not it is used for the fluctuation display. If the determination result in S684 is YES, a pre-reading notice execution flag is set (S685).

  In S680, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, the pre-reading notice is not scheduled to start and is not being executed, so the notice effect is executed using the flag non-set notice type determination table described later. Whether or not to do so and the notice type are determined (S681). The notice determined in S681 is a normal notice effect that is executed only in the variable display starting from now. Thereby, even when the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, the normal notice effect is executed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. In S681, the same process as in S676 described above is performed. In S682, a notice pattern corresponding to the decided notice type is determined, and the notice setting process is terminated. In S682, when the selected variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous, the process data for executing the notice effect by the decided notice pattern in the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the first variation. Is set. If it is decided to perform the button notice effect during the pseudo-series variation display, an operation valid period for effectively accepting the button operation is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation. Process data is set.

  As described above, in each of S677, S682, and S683, when the selected variation pattern is a quasi-continuous, the announcement effect by the determined cautionary pattern is executed in the initial variation in the quasi-continuous and each re-variation after the first variation. An example in which process data for setting is set has been described. As a result, in the initial variation in the quasi-ream and each re-variation after the initial variation, the notice effect by the same notice pattern determined in S677, S682, and S683 is executed. However, in the first variation in the pseudo-ream and each re-variation after the first variation, the notice effect is not limited to the same notice pattern determined in each of S677, S682, and S683. In each of the initial variation and each re-variation, a notice pattern to be executed may be determined, and a notice effect based on the notice pattern determined in each change may be executed. Further, in the case of a pseudo-ream, it is further determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed for each initial change and each re-variation, and a notice according to the notice pattern determined for the change in which the notice effect is executed out of each change. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Thereby, the variation of the notice effect in the case of a pseudo-ream can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when it is determined in S676 and S681 that the button notice effect is to be performed during the pseudo-series variation display, the initial variation of the pseudo-series and the re-variation after the initial variation in S677, S682, and S683, An example in which process data for setting an operation valid period for effectively accepting button operations has been described has been described. As a result, the button operation can be performed in the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial variation.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a notice type determination table. The notice type determination table is a table that is referred to in S676 and S681 of FIG. 63 in order to decide whether or not to execute the notice and the notice type to be executed.

  The notice type determination table is referred to when the prefetch notice flag is set, and a flag set notice type decision table for determining the type of the prefetch notice effect, and the prefetch notice flag and the prefetch notice execution flag are set. A flag non-set notice type determination table that is referred to when there is no flag and determines the type of the normal notice effect. In the flag setting notice type determination table and the flag non-setting notice type determination table, determination values are set in accordance with the types of received variation pattern commands. The type of received variation pattern command refers to the variation display pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a based on the variation pattern command.

  In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the notice type is determined according to the determination value determined for each pattern depending on which pattern shown in FIG. 62 the received variation pattern command belongs to. . That is, the non-reach pattern shown in No1 (non-reach normal fluctuation, non-reach one-time pseudo-ream), the reach pattern other than non-ream and pseudo-representation shown in No2 (normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2, Special Normal Reach, Special Super Reach 1, Special Super Reach 2 are collectively referred to as No. 3 and one-time pseudo-continuous pattern (one-time pseudo-ream a, one-time pseudo-ream b, special one-time pseudo-ream a, special 1 No. 4 pseudo-continuous pattern b, alternative pseudo-continuous pattern generically referred to as one-time pseudo-continuous pattern, No. 4 and two-time pseudo-continuous pattern (two-time pseudo-series a, two-time pseudo-series b, special two-time pseudo-series a, Special two-time quasi-continuous b and two-time quasi-continuous of alternative quasi-continuous pattern are collectively referred to as No5 and three-time quasi-continuous pattern (three-time quasi-continuous a, three-time quasi-continuous b, Three-time pseudo-ream a and special 3-times pseudo-ream b), reach pattern other than the pseudo-ream shown in No.6, hit as shown in No.7 and one-time pseudo-ream pattern, hit as shown in No.8 and twice a pseudo-ream A judgment value for determining a notice type is set corresponding to each of a plurality of patterns of the pattern, No. 9 and the three-time pseudo-continuous pattern, and the pattern to which the variable display pattern to be started belongs belongs to. Processing for determining the notice type is performed according to the correspondingly determined determination value.

  In this embodiment, when the patterns belong to the same pattern, the reach type of the variation pattern other than the quasi-ream (normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2) and the quasi-reach reach type (super reach 1). Regardless of whether or not it is a pseudo-ream a, a super-ream 2 pseudo-ream b), the presence or absence of a slip, the number of out-of-shift pattern variations, and whether or not it is a special variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach type of the variation pattern (normal reach, super reach 1, super reach 2) other than the quasi-continuous to be reached, even if belonging to the same pattern, quasi-continuous Reach type (pseudo ream a which becomes super reach 1 and pseudo ream b which becomes super reach 2), presence or absence of slip, Number shift frames of the variation pattern to be les, and may be determined prior notice types according to different sorting according to whether at least one is a special pattern of variation.

  When the flag setting notice type determination table is referred to, it is determined based on a value extracted from the random SR 7 as one of a pseudo-continuous notice, a hit notice, a button notice, or a step-up notice. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous notice or a winning notice is determined and a pseudo-ream is specified from the pre-reading notice flag, it is decided as a pseudo-continuous notice, and when a winning is specified from the pre-reading notice flag, it is decided as a winning notice. The The pseudo continuous notice and the hit notice may be selected as the pre-read notice effect, but are not selected as the normal notice effect.

  For example, when the variable display pattern to be started from now (the pattern selected in S1553 or S1553a) is a non-reach and non-reach pattern indicated by No1, the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1-80. "Is determined to be a pseudo-continuous notice or a hit notice," 81 to 85 "is determined to be a button notice, and" 86 to 100 "is determined to be a step-up notice.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a reach pattern other than the outlier and pseudo-ream shown in No. 2, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 70”, the pseudo-recurring notice is given. Or, it is determined as a hit notice, and when it is “71-80”, it is decided as a button notice, and when it is “81-100”, it is decided as a step-up notice.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and one-time pseudo-continuous pattern shown in No. 3, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1-60”, When it is “61-75”, it is determined as a button notification, and when it is “76-100”, it is determined as a step-up notification.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and two-time pseudo-continuous pattern shown in No. 4, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 50”, When it is “51 to 70”, it is determined as a button notification, and when it is “71 to 100”, it is determined as a step-up notification.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and three-time pseudo-continuous pattern shown in No. 5, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1-40”, When it is “41 to 65”, it is determined to be a button notification, and when it is “66 to 100”, it is determined to be a step-up notification.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a reach pattern other than the hit and pseudo-ream shown in No 6, when the value extracted from the random SR 7 is “1 to 60”, the button is notified. When it is “61-100”, it is determined to be a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a hit and one-time pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 7, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 75”, it is determined as the button notice. When it is “76-100”, it is determined to be a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a winning and two-time pseudo-continuous pattern shown in No. 8, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 80”, the button notification is determined. When it is “81 to 100”, it is determined to be a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is the winning and three-time pseudo-continuous pattern shown in No. 9, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 90”, the button notification is determined. When it is “91-100”, it is determined to be a step-up notice.

  The flag set notice type determination table has a high probability when a variable display with a non-reach pattern starts from now on, that is, when a variable pattern with a relatively low expectation level for big hits is displayed in the current variable display. The determination value is set so that the pseudo continuous notice or the hit notice is determined as the notice type. Thereby, even if it is a case where the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern with a low big hit expectation degree is performed, the interest of the game can be improved by performing the pseudo-continuous notice or the hit notice.

  On the other hand, when the variable display by the reach pattern other than the non-pseudo continuous pattern or the 1st to 3rd pseudo continuous pattern is started from now on, that is, the variable display by the variable pattern having a relatively high expectation degree of big hit is performed in the current variable display. In this case, the determination value is set so that the button notice or step-up notice is determined as the notice type with a higher probability than the pseudo-continuous notice or the hit notice. As a result, the fluctuation display of this time is performed by performing a pseudo-continuous notice or a hit notice that can only be selected as a look-ahead notice effect, even though the fluctuation display is based on a fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience that makes it seem unlikely that a big hit will occur.

  In addition, when the variable display by the pseudo-continuous pattern is started from now on, the higher the number of re-variable pseudo-continuous patterns, the higher the probability that the button notice or step-up notice will be notified The determination value is set so as to be determined as As a result, the fluctuation display of this time is performed by performing a pseudo-continuous notice or a hit notice that can only be selected as a look-ahead notice effect, even though the fluctuation display is based on a fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience that makes it seem unlikely that a big hit will occur.

  In addition, in the flag set notice type determination table, when the winning variation display is started from now on, the pseudo continuous notice or the hit notice is not decided as the notice type, but the button notice or step-up notice is decided. The judgment value is set as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unnatural notice that would be a big hit in the current variable display even though a pseudo-continuous notice or a winning notice that is only selected as a pre-reading notice effect has been started. be able to.

  Further, the determination value is set so that the button notice is determined at a higher probability than the step-up notice when the hit is made, rather than when the hit is made. This makes it possible for the player to have a high sense of expectation for a big hit in the current variation display when a button notification is made.

  When the flag set notice type determination table in FIG. 64 is used to determine whether to be a pseudo-continuous notice or a winning notice, the fact that it is a false series (including winning) is specified based on the pre-reading notice flag. Sometimes a false notice is executed, and when a hit is specified instead of a false notice, a hit notice is executed.

  Next, the case where the flag non-setting notice type determination table is referred will be described. When the flag non-set notice type determination table is referred to, it is determined as any of no notice, button notice, and step-up notice based on the value extracted from the random SR7. As described above, the normal notice effect is configured so that the pseudo-continuous notice and the winning notice are not selected.

  For example, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and non-reach pattern shown in No1, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 80”, it is determined without notice, When it is “81-85”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “86-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a reach pattern other than the false and pseudo-continuous shown in No2, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is "1 to 70", without notice When it is “71-80”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “81-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and one-time pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 3, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 60”, it is determined without notice. When it is “61-75”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “76-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and two-time pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 4, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 50”, it is decided without notice. When it is “51-70”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “71-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is an outlier and three-times pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 5, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 40”, it is decided without notice. When it is “41-65”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “66-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  Also, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a reach pattern other than the hit and pseudo-ream shown in No. 6, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is "1 to 15", without notice When it is “16-75”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “76-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  In addition, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a hit and one-time pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 7, when the value extracted from the random SR is "1 to 10", it is decided without notice. When it is “11-80”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “81-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is a winning and two-time pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 8, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1 to 5”, it is decided without notice. When it is “6 to 85”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “86 to 100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  Further, when the variable display pattern to be started from now is the winning and three-times pseudo continuous pattern shown in No. 9, when the value extracted from the random SR7 is “1-2”, it is determined without notice. When it is “3-89”, it is determined as a button advance notice, and when it is “90-100”, it is determined as a step-up notice.

  In the flag non-set notice type determination table, when a winning variation display is started from now, a determination value is set so that a button notice or a step-up notice is easily decided. Thereby, since it becomes easy to perform a notice effect when it becomes a hit in this variation display, the opportunity to improve the interest of the game by the notice effect can be increased.

  Further, the determination value is set so that the button notice is determined at a higher probability than the step-up notice when the hit is made, rather than when the hit is made. This makes it possible for the player to have a high sense of expectation for a big hit in the current variation display when a button notification is made.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of a notice pattern determination table. FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram showing a notice pattern determination table for pseudo-continuous notice. The notice pattern of the pseudo continuous notice refers to, for example, the type of character that appears during the pseudo continuous notice. The notice pattern determination table of the pseudo-continuous notice is such that the type of character to appear is determined based on the value extracted from the SR8 according to the determination value determined according to the type of the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-series to be notified. It is configured. Note that the type of the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream to be notified is specified by the above-described pre-read notification flag.

  When the type of pseudo-ream to be notified is a pseudo-ream once and the value extracted from the random SR8 is “1 to 90”, the character A (for example, the character shown in FIG. 46 (F1)) is If it is “91-100”, character B (for example, the character shown in FIG. 46 (F2)) is determined.

  When the type of pseudo-ream to be notified is the pseudo-ream twice, the character A is determined when the value extracted from the random SR8 is “1-50”, and when the value is “51-100” B is determined.

  When the type of pseudo-ream to be notified is three-time pseudo-ream and the value extracted from the random SR8 is “1-10”, the character A is determined, and when the value is “11-100”, the character A is determined. B is determined.

  As described above, the notice pattern determination table of the pseudo-continuous notice shown in FIG. 65A is based on the type of the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-series to be notified, that is, according to the determination value determined for each number of fluctuations. Is configured to be determined. For this reason, the notice pattern is determined according to a ratio determined for each number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream. In the notice pattern determination table for pseudo-continuous notice shown in FIG. 65 (A), the character A is more easily determined as the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-series to be notified becomes smaller. The determination value is set so that the greater the number, the easier the character B is determined.

  12A and 12B and the big hit table shown in FIGS. 12C and 12D are compared with each other, as described above. In the case of the big hit table, the number of determination values is set so that when the pseudo-series is determined as the variation pattern type, the pseudo-series having a large number of variations is easily determined. For this reason, when character B appears rather than when character A appears, a sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 65 (A), the example in which the notice pattern is determined according to the determination value determined according to the number of changes has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the notification is provided according to the determination value determined according to the number of changes. Any pattern can be used. For example, even if the notice pattern is determined according to the determination value set for when the number of fluctuations is once and twice, and the notice pattern is determined according to the determination value set for when it is three times Good.

  FIG. 65 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice pattern determination table for winning notice. The hit notice notice pattern refers to, for example, the type of character that appears during the hit notice. The hitting notice pattern determination table is configured to determine the type of character to appear based on the value extracted from SR9 in accordance with a determination value determined according to the type of hit to be notified. Note that the type of hit for the advance notice is specified by the aforementioned prefetch notice flag.

  When the hit type is 15R big hit and the value extracted from the random SR9 is “1 to 90”, the character A (for example, the character shown in FIG. 46 (E1)) is determined, and “91 to 100”. Is determined, character B (for example, the character shown in FIG. 46 (E1)) is determined.

  When the hit type is 16R big hit and the value extracted from the random SR 9 is “1-10”, the character A is determined, and when the value is “11-100”, the character B is determined.

  As described above, in the hit notice notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65B, the character A is more easily determined as the hit type is 15R jackpot, and the character B is more easily determined as 16R jackpot. The judgment value is set as follows.

  Note that the character type may be determined according to a determination value determined according to whether or not the hit type is a probable hit. In this case, the reliability with respect to the probable big hit can be varied depending on the type of character. Further, the type of character is determined according to a determination value determined according to whether the hit type is 15R big hit, 16R probability variation B big hit, 16R probability variation C big hit, or 16R probability variation A big hit. May be. In this case, the reliability of the 16R probability variation A big hit advantageous for the player can be varied depending on the character type.

  In addition, you may make it notify a small hit or 2R big hit as a hit notice. In this case, the character type is determined according to a determination value determined according to whether the hit type is small hit or 2R big hit, 15R big hit or 16R big hit. May be. In this case, depending on the type of character, the reliability of the player gaining a large 15R jackpot or 16R jackpot can be varied.

  FIG. 65 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a background determination table at the time of notification for determining the background in the variable display for executing the notification effect. The background determination table is configured such that the background type is determined based on the value extracted from the SR 10 in accordance with the determination value determined according to the reach type (including non-reach) of the variable display to be notified. ing. Note that the reach type of the variable display to be notified is specified by the pre-read notification flag described above.

  When the reach type is non-reach or normal reach and the value extracted from the random SR 10 is “1 to 70”, the background A (for example, the background shown in FIG. 49A) is determined. When it is “85”, the background B (for example, the background shown in FIG. 49B) is determined, and when it is “86 to 100”, the background C (for example, the background shown in FIG. 49C) is determined.

  When the reach type is Super Reach 1 and the value extracted from the random SR 10 is “1 to 15”, the background A is determined, and when the value is “16 to 85”, the background B is determined. When it is “˜100”, the background C is determined.

  When the reach type is Super Reach 2 and the value extracted from the random SR 10 is “1 to 15”, the background A is determined, and when the value is “16 to 30”, the background B is determined. When it is “˜100”, the background C is determined.

  As described above, the background determination table shown in FIG. 65 (C) is configured such that the notice pattern is determined according to the determination value determined according to the reach type in the variable display to be noticed. Yes. For this reason, the notice pattern is determined according to the ratio determined according to the reach type in the variable display to be noticed. In the background determination table shown in FIG. 65C, the background A is more easily determined when the reach type is non-reach or normal reach, and the background B is more easily determined when the reach type is super reach 1. The determination value is set so that the background C is more easily determined as the value is 2.

  Note that, as explained in comparison with the table for reaching out of reach in FIG. 12B and the table for hitting in big hits in FIGS. In the time table, the number of determination values is set so that the super reach 2 is more easily determined as the reach type than the super reach 1. For this reason, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit when notified by the background C than when notified by the background A or the background B.

  In FIG. 65C, the example in which the notice pattern is determined according to the determination value determined according to the reach type has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. It is also possible to set a determination value corresponding to each of the case of the normal reach and the normal reach, and to determine the notice pattern according to the determination value determined according to the reach type.

  When no notice is given, for example, background A is displayed as the default of the background.

  As the pseudo-sequential notice, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), “presence / absence of pseudo-ream and number of fluctuations of pseudo-ream” are shown for the character, and “reach type after pseudo-sequential” is shown in the background as shown in FIG. 65 (C). As a notice, a combination of a plurality of display contents has been disclosed. For example, in one display contents (for example, only a character, only a background) The “reach type after pseudo-continuation” may be notified in advance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the character “presence / absence of jackpot and type of jackpot” is notified as a hit notice, and “reach type in the variation that becomes big hit” is shown in the background as shown in FIG. 65 (C). As described above, what is announced in advance by a combination of a plurality of display contents has been disclosed. For example, in one display content (for example, only a character, only a background) The “reach type” may be notified in advance.

  Further, the number, type, and combination of display contents used for the advance notice are not limited to those illustrated in FIG. Further, the advance notice is not limited to display contents such as an image, but may be performed by sound, a lamp (LED), or a combination thereof.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the background is used for a plurality of notices such as a pseudo-annual notice and a hit notice, and the “reach type” executed in the change subject to the notice is notified. The reach type specifying character may appear only at the time of pseudo-sequential notice, and the “reach type after pseudo-sequential” may be notified by the reach type specifying character.

  As described above, in FIG. 65, the table for determining the notice pattern for the pseudo-continuous notice and the winning notice has been described. Similarly, for the button notice and the step-up notice, one notice pattern is determined from a plurality of kinds of notice patterns. It is comprised so that. For example, when a step-up notice is determined as a notice type, one notice pattern is determined from a plurality of kinds of notice patterns with different number of stages so that the reliability of the big hit (reach) differs depending on the number of stages to be stepped up. The

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes process data as data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the effect symbol display mode) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the flashing of the light emitter in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and controls the sound output from the speaker 27. Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the movable member 78 in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  In the process table, for example, different process data is set for each production operation of production symbols such as the above-described pseudo-series and slips. Different process data is set depending on Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute the notice effect in the variation display based on a certain variation pattern, the process data that can execute the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined in the variation pattern is selected. It becomes.

  The process table shown in FIG. 66 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. The process table corresponds to, for example, more specifically the above-described symbol variation control pattern table and various effect control pattern tables.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed according to the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value elapses, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, and the movable member 78. By repeating the process of controlling the effect, the effect in the change of the effect pattern of one time is realized. In addition, dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to an effect part that is not controlled during the fluctuation period.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (S802) in the effect control process. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process (S846) executed in the effect control process.

  In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

  Until the process timer times out (S843N), the process proceeds to S846. If it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (S843Y), the process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (S845). . Thereby, the notice effect by the decided notice pattern can be executed.

  In S846, an operation effect process is executed. Here, after explaining the processing contents of the operation effect process first, the other processing contents of the effect symbol changing process will be explained. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process.

  In the operation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not process data for performing a button notice effect is set as process data (S8431). Thereby, it can be confirmed whether it is the time of the variable display which can perform a button notice effect. When it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is not set, the operation effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process data for performing the button notice effect is set, it is confirmed whether or not the current operation is valid for the button notice effect (S8432). The operation effective period of the button notice effect is set as the start of the operation effective period when a predetermined timing (predetermined timing before the symbol derivation display is started) has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Thereby, at the start and end of the operation effective period of the button notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize based on the time value of the variable time timer that starts counting from the start of the variable display. . Accordingly, whether or not the operation is valid for the button notice effect is determined based on the time value of the variable time timer. When it is determined that the button notice effect is to be performed during the pseudo-series variation display, the operation valid period is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation in each of S677, S682, and S683. Is set. For this reason, the button operation is valid in the first variation of the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the first variation, and the notice effect is executed by operating the button.

  When it is determined that the operation is valid, it is confirmed whether or not an operation completion flag that is set when the operation button 30 is operated during the operation validity period is set (S8433). When it is determined that the operation completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 30 has been operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 30 (S8434).

  When it is determined that the operation button 30 is operated, the button notice effect is started (S8435), and the operation effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S8432 that the operation is not valid, when it is determined that the operated flag is set in S8433, or when it is determined that the operation button 30 is not operated in S8434, the operation effect is displayed. End the process.

  Returning to FIG. 68, in S847, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out based on the value of the variable time timer (S847). If the variation time timer has timed out (Y in S847), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S849). On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (N in S847), it is confirmed whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that a symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S848). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S848), the effect symbol changing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the confirmed command reception flag is set (Y in S848), the process proceeds to S849. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out (N in S848), the control shifts to the variation stop when receiving the symbol determination designation command. For example, it shows a long variation time due to noise between substrates. Even when a variation pattern command is received, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  In addition, the part which performs the process of S841-S845 based on the fluctuation pattern containing the effect of a "pseudo ream" is equivalent to the re-change effect control process which performs a re-change effect.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S877. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not (S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on this, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not a small hit symbol or a big hit display symbol is displayed in the process of S872 (S873). When it is determined in S872 that neither a small winning symbol nor a big winning display symbol is displayed (that is, when a loss symbol is displayed), the production control CPU 101 waits for a variation pattern command to be received. The value is updated according to the process (S800) (S874).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S872 that the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol has been stopped, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (S876), indicating that the big hit starting designation command has been received. The big hit start / receipt start command reception flag indicating that a big hit start designation command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether there is (S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S878), and displays a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. Select (S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. In the process of S879, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table such as a fanfare effect corresponding to the hit type. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) 1) The control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, and the movable member 78 as the effect part) is executed (S881). ). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S882).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another embodiment of the start port switch passage process shown in FIG. Differences from FIG. 17 will be described.

  When the CPU 56 determines in S218 that neither the prefetch big hit flag nor the prefetch small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 judges whether or not the probability change flag is set (S218b). If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU S219. Migrate to On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is set, the process proceeds to S221.

  In S229, when it is determined that neither the prefetch big hit flag nor the prefetch small hit flag is set, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is set (S229b). If the probability change flag is set, S230 is set. Migrate to On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S232.

  As described above, the first prefetch process (S219) is executed when the probability change flag is not set and the second prefetch process (S230) is prohibited, and the first prefetch process is set when the probability change flag is set. While the prefetching process (S219) is prohibited, the second prefetching process (S230) is executed. As a result, at the time of uncertain change, the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning port 13 is allowed, while the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning port 14 is allowed. Execution is prohibited. Further, at the time of probability change, execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is prohibited, while pre-read based on the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 Execution of the notice effect is allowed.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another embodiment after the start-port switch passing process shown in FIG. Differences from FIG. 17 will be described.

  When the CPU 56 determines in S218 that neither the prefetch big hit flag nor the prefetch small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 judges whether or not the probability change flag is set (S218c). If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU S219. Migrate to On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is set, the process proceeds to S221.

  As described above, both the first prefetching process (S219) and the second prefetching process (S230) are executed when the probability change flag is not set. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is set, execution of the first prefetch process (S219) is prohibited and only the second prefetch process (S230) is executed. As a result, a pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is allowed at the time of the uncertain change. Further, at the time of probability change, execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold memory by the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is prohibited, and the pre-reading notice based on the hold memory by the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 Only the production is allowed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27 and the like) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output lamp 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As described in S218a and S229a in FIG. 17, S218b and S229b in FIG. 71, or S218c in FIG. 72, stored in one of the first and second reserved storage buffers (see FIG. 19B). Since the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reserved memory information being held is prohibited, the pre-reading notice based on the reserved memory accompanying the passage of the game medium to both the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Compared to the case where the performance is always executed, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the player's interest is too biased toward the pre-reading notice and excessive inconvenience, and the player's interest for the pre-reading notice You can keep a good balance with your interests and enjoy a well-rounded game.

  (2) As described with reference to FIGS. 19A, S52, and S54, when the stored storage information is stored in both the first and second reserved storage buffers (see FIG. 19B), the second The variable display of the second variable display means (second special symbol display device 9a, effect display device 9) based on the hold storage information stored in the hold storage buffer is preferentially executed. Then, as described in S218a and S229a in FIG. 17, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage buffer in the high base state (when the hour / short flag is set) is prohibited. As a result, the following effects are exhibited.

  For example, a preferential notice effect is produced for both the hold storage stored in both the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, with priority being given to the variable display based on the hold storage information stored in the second hold storage buffer. In the state where the specific game state occurs in the hold storage information of the first hold storage buffer and the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, in the high base state, When the game medium frequently passes, the hold storage information is successively stored in the second hold storage buffer, while the variable display based on the hold storage information stored in the second hold storage buffer is preferentially established. Then, the variable display of the second variable display means (second special symbol display 9a, effect display device 9) is executed one after another, and the first start condition is hardly satisfied. A state in which read-ahead prediction effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending memory buffer that has state is endlessly continued. In such a state, there is a possibility that a certain gaming state is generated in the pending storage information of the second pending storage buffer, and a certain gaming state is established in the pending storage information of the second pending storage buffer. If it occurs and it is pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold memory buffer and the pre-read notice effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold memory buffer. Both are executed, and a state in which a pre-reading notice is given that the specific gaming state is substantially continuously generated (continuous change). As a result, there arises a disadvantage that euphoria is remarkably increased.

  In order to prevent such inconvenience, the prefetching notice effect based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage buffer is prohibited, so that the big hit is continuously generated (continuous change notice). It becomes possible to avoid the state to do and to suppress the excessive improvement in euphoria.

  (3) As described in S218b and S229b of FIG. 71, execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage buffer is prohibited in the probability change state, and in the game state other than the probability change state, 2 Since the execution of the prefetching notice effect based on the hold memory information stored in the hold memory buffer is prohibited, the number of variable display means corresponding to the hold memory information that is the target of the prefetch notice effect does not change, and the prefetch notice effect And the player's interest in the current variable display can be distributed in a balanced manner.

  (4) As described in S218c of FIG. 72, in the game state other than the probability change state, the prefetch notice effect is not prohibited, and the prefetch based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage buffer in the probability change state. Execution of the notice effect is prohibited. As a result, the following effects are exhibited.

  In game states other than the probabilistic state, it is unlikely that a large number of hit storage information will be generated in the hold storage information in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Is not prohibited, and the inconvenience that the pre-reading notice effect is hardly executed is prevented, and in the probability change state in which a large number of big hit states are likely to occur in the hold storage information, it is based on the hold storage information in the first hold storage buffer. Prohibiting the execution of pre-reading notice effects, preventing the inconvenience of pre-reading notices indicating that multiple specific gaming states occur in the stored memory information and the big hit state is continuously generated (continuous change). The improvement of gambling can be suppressed.

  (5) As shown in S661 of FIG. 57, even when the start winning designation command is received, if the prefetch notice effect is being executed or is scheduled to start, the prefetch notice effect based on the start prize is given. Processing to execute is not performed. As a result, the occurrence of inconveniences that drastically increase the player's gambling feeling by executing the pre-reading notice effect in duplicate, and the pre-reading notice effect for a plurality of reserved memories are executed, It is possible to prevent occurrence of inconvenience that causes confusion.

  Further, as shown in S218 and S229 of FIG. 17, when the pre-read big hit flag or the pre-read small hit flag is already set in the pre-read process, the big hit or the small hit ends and the flag is reset. Up to this point, the prefetching process itself is not performed. For this reason, when there is a possibility that the pre-reading notice effect is executed in duplicate, the pre-reading process is not performed unnecessarily, so that the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  (6) As described above, in order to reset the prefetch big hit flag in S449a of FIG. 28 and reset the prefetch small hit flag in S309 of FIG. Thus, the player who wants to execute the pre-reading notice effect can be made to be able to execute the pre-reading notice effect again, and the interest can be improved.

  (7) As shown in S101 and S105 of FIGS. 12, 13, and 22, as a method of determining the variation pattern, first, the variation pattern type is determined, and then the variation pattern type is varied. A stepwise decision method is used to determine the pattern. For this reason, for example, without changing the distribution of the determination values used for determining the variation pattern type, the setting for selecting the variation pattern can be changed simply by changing the distribution of the determination values used for determining the variation pattern. Therefore, the design change of the variation pattern can be facilitated.

  (8) As shown in S676 and S677 of FIGS. 64, 65, and 63, as a method of determining the pre-reading notice effect, first, the notice type is determined, and then the notice pattern is determined according to the notice type. A step-by-step decision method is adopted. For this reason, for example, without changing the distribution of the judgment value used for determining the notice type, the setting for selecting the pre-reading notice effect is changed only by changing the distribution of the judgment value used for determining the notice pattern. Therefore, the design change of the pre-reading notice effect can be facilitated.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a pseudo-ream is always given when a pseudo-sequential notice is made, and a win is always made when a successful notice is made. However, it may be configured so that a so-called fake (gasse) notice is performed so as not to follow the notice. For example, even if it is determined in S662 in FIG. 57 that it is not a pseudo-ream or a hit, a pseudo-continuous notice or a hit notice may be performed with a predetermined probability. As a result, a false notice is given as a pre-reading notice effect, which increases the chances of the pre-reading notice effect being executed, and also allows the player to have a sense of expectation that it will be in accordance with the notice. Can improve the interest of

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the pre-reading notice effect is always performed when it is determined to be a pseudo-ream or winning in S662 of FIG. 57 has been described. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect with a predetermined probability even when it is determined to be a pseudo-ream or winning. Thereby, even when the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that it will be a pseudo-ream or a win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of whether or not the pre-reading process is performed at the time of starting winning, the hit determination, reach determination, and variation pattern type determination at the start of variation are performed as shown in FIGS. The example to perform was demonstrated. However, the determination result determined in the pre-reading process is stored, and at the start of variation, the determination result is used to specify whether to win, whether to reach, or which variation pattern type to use May be. Thereby, since the determination result at the time of starting winning can be used as it is at the start of variation, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the determination result does not always match between the pre-reading process and the start of variation depending on whether the gaming state is a probable change state or the number of reserved storages. For this reason, as described above, in the case of using the determination result in the prefetch process at the start of variation, it is prefetched whether or not the gaming state at the start of variation of the start winning prize is the probability variation state during the prefetch process. The hit determination may be performed with the probability based on the determination result, and the determination value used for the reach determination or the variation pattern type determination may not be changed depending on the number of reserved memories.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIG. 46C and S666 of FIG. 57, the example in which the hold display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is displayed in a black circle mode has been described. However, the mode of the hold display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this, and may be a mode different from the normal mode (for example, white circle). For example, you may display in the aspect shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a notice mode of hold display.

  73 (A) and 73 (B) are diagrams for explaining a notice mode of a hold display that is a target of pseudo-continuous notice. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the display may be suspended in such a manner that the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-run to be notified is notified. For example, the notice mode of the hold display is a case where “1” corresponding to one time is displayed in a white circle when the pseudo-ream to be notified is a one-time pseudo-ream and the pseudo-ream is a two-time pseudo-ream. May be configured such that “2” corresponding to 2 times is displayed in a white circle, and “3” corresponding to 3 times is displayed in a white circle in the case of 3 pseudo-continuations. Thereby, according to the mode of the hold display, it is possible to give notice of becoming a pseudo-ream and the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the display may be held in a manner in which the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-series to be notified is notified. For example, the notice mode of the hold display is displayed as a square when the pseudo-ream to be notified is a one-time pseudo-ream, displayed as a star when the pseudo-ream is a three-time pseudo-ream, and displayed twice as a pseudo-ream. In the case of a ream, it may be displayed in a form selected by lottery among squares or stars. Thereby, according to the mode of the hold display, it can be notified in advance whether to become a quasi-continuous and whether the number of fluctuations of the quasi-continuous is large or small.

  FIG. 73C is a diagram for explaining a notice mode of a hold display that is a target of a hit notice. The notice mode of the hold display that is the target of the hit notice may be one that can give notice of the hit type. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the display may be held in a manner in which the type of hit to be notified is notified. As for the notice mode of the hold display, when the hit type to be notified is 16R probability variation C, it is displayed with a square, when it is 16R probability variation A, it is displayed with an asterisk. It may be an aspect of displaying in a predetermined form. Thereby, it is possible to notify the winning and the type of winning according to the mode of holding display.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, while one of the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 9a is variably displayed, the other variation is stopped. showed that. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 9a may be controlled to change at the same time. Also good).

  (5) In the first prefetch process and the second prefetch process in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the hit determination (S240, S245), the hit type determination (S243), the reach determination (S248), and the fluctuation The example in which the pattern type determination (S252) is performed and the start winning designation command based on these determination results is transmitted has been described. However, in the first prefetch process and the second prefetch process, the same process as S103 and S105 in FIG. 22, that is, the variation pattern determination is performed, and the start winning designation command based on the determination result including the variation pattern is transmitted. You may comprise. Thus, since the variation pattern is determined in the prefetch process, it is possible to perform a prefetch notice effect based on the type of the variation pattern.

  In the above-described embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 7, random 2-2, random 3, and random 4 are provided, and an example in which a variation pattern is determined based on values extracted from these has been described. You may comprise so that a fluctuation pattern (including the presence or absence of reach) may be determined based on the value extracted from the random 4, without providing the random 2-2 and the random 3. In this case, in the first prefetch process and the second prefetch process, a win determination (S240, S245), a hit type determination (S243), and a variation pattern determination are performed, and a start winning designation command based on these determination results is transmitted. You may comprise as follows.

  (6) In the first prefetching process and the second prefetching process in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, whether or not the hit is, the type of the win, the reach, or the type of reach is It is determined whether it is a quasi-continuous, the type of the number of fluctuations of the quasi-continuous, etc., and a start winning designation command is transmitted based on these determination results, and the effect control micro The example which performs the process for performing the prefetch notice effect by the computer 100 was demonstrated. However, in the first prefetch process and the second prefetch process, it is not limited to the above items to be determined, and one or more of the following items are determined, and a start winning designation command based on these determination results is transmitted, The effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform processing for executing the pre-reading notice effect.

  As items to be judged, for example, if the hit type with a short time that is controlled to a short time state after the end of the hit and the short time without a short time state that is not controlled with the short time state are set as the type of hit, whether or not the short time hit is determined. You may make it determine.

  In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a so-called promotion effect during the winning game state or after the winning game state is finished when it is a win, it is determined whether or not a further promotion effect is to be performed when it is determined to be a win. It may be. The promotion effect is, for example, an effect related to whether or not to be promoted to a probability variable jackpot after making a non-probable big hit, an effect related to whether or not to be promoted to a timed hit after making a short timeless hit, and 16R probability variable big hit C An effect related to whether or not to be promoted to a hit with a higher degree of advantage than the hit after making a hit with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, such as an effect related to whether or not to later promote to 16R probability variation big hit A or B Say.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first start winning designation command or the like corresponding to the prefetch determination result is transmitted at the same timing as that of the prefetch processing (S219, S230). It is not necessary to transmit at the same timing as the pre-reading process (S219, S230), such as transmitting collectively at the start of display.

  (7) The start winning designation command in the above-described embodiment has been described as an example including information for adding and displaying the hold display and information related to the prefetch determination result. However, a command indicating information related to the prefetch determination result may be transmitted as a command different from a command indicating information for adding and displaying the hold display. Moreover, you may comprise so that only the command which shows the information regarding the prefetch determination result may be transmitted, without transmitting the command which shows the information which adds and displays a hold display.

  (8) As shown in S218 and S229 in FIG. 17, when the prefetch big hit flag or the prefetch small hit flag has already been set in the prefetch process, the big hit or the small hit ends and the flag is reset. Until now, an example in which the prefetch process itself is not performed has been described. However, even when the prefetch big hit flag or the prefetch small hit flag is set, the prefetch process is performed and the start winning designation command based on the prefetch determination result is not transmitted (specifically, the start winning designation without judgment is performed). A command may be transmitted).

  Further, it may be configured to perform a prefetch process and transmit a start winning designation command based on the prefetch determination result without performing the processes shown in S218 and S229 of FIG. Even in this case, as described in S661 of FIG. 57, the start control designation command is ignored on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100, and the process for executing the new prefetch notice effect is not performed. It is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being executed repeatedly.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice prohibition means (S218a and S229a in FIG. 17 or S218b and S229b in FIG. 71 or S218c in FIG. 72) for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect is used for all the notices (the simulation shown in FIG. 64). In the above example, all of the continuous notice / periphery notice, button notice, and step-up notice are prohibited. However, instead of this, only a part of the notice may be controlled, as shown in FIG. You may control to prohibit only a certain combination of various notices.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the processes of S218 and S229 in FIG. 17 and the process of S661 in FIG. However, a priority may be set for the type of the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect may be executed in a duplicated manner when the subsequent judgment result is a judgment result with a high priority. For example, even if the prior notice is set to be higher in priority than the pseudo-continuous notice and the pseudo-continuous notice is being executed, if the prefetch determination result is true, the pseudo-continuous notice is continuously executed. In addition, the hitting notice may be executed in parallel. In the case where the pseudo-announcement and the hit notice are executed in parallel, for example, a character having a placard with a message such as “May have been hit in the memory” may appear. Good. Further, after the change of the pseudo-ream is finished, for example, a character having a placard with a message such as “may be in memory” may appear. Even if it is configured so that the pre-reading notice effect is executed in duplicate as described above, the hit notice is not executed repeatedly in order to prevent the happiness from being excessively increased. Also good.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the prefetching notice effect determined in S676 and S677 of FIG. 63 is repeatedly executed from the start of the prefetching notice effect until the change that is the subject of the notice. However, the pre-reading notice effect determined in S676 and S677 in FIG. 63 is not limited to being repeatedly executed. For example, the notice pattern is determined for each change up to the change to be noticed, and the pre-read pattern is pre-read. You may comprise so that a notice effect may be performed. Thereby, since the variation of the prefetching notice effect performed before the change which becomes the object of the notice is increased after the prefetching notice effect is started, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the variable display based on each of the hold memory to be notified and the hold memory (precaution execution hold memory) stored before the hold memory. An example was described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect is selected at a predetermined probability in each variable display based on the notice execution hold storage, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the variable display when winning is selected. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the pre-reading notice effect is executed in each variation of the pseudo-continuous has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is to be executed is drawn at a predetermined probability in each variation of the pseudo-series, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the change when winning.

  Note that whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be configured such that lottery is performed according to different probabilities depending on whether or not the variable display to be noticed is a big hit. For example, if it is configured to win with a higher probability when the variable display subject to notice is a big hit than when it is out of date, whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed continuously It is possible to draw attention to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the type of the pre-reading notice effect and the notice pattern are determined on the effect control microcomputer 100 side has been described. However, the type of prefetching notice effect and the notice pattern may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and the type of prefetching notice effect is decided on the game control microcomputer 560 side according to the type. The notice pattern may be determined on the production control microcomputer 100 side.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the pre-reading process is performed when a valid start winning is confirmed has been described. However, the prefetching process may be performed at any timing as long as it is a stage before starting the variable display based on the start winning, not only at the starting winning. For example, the prefetch process may be performed when the variable display based on the oldest hold storage is started. In this case, for example, all start winnings that have been confirmed from the start of the previous fluctuation display to the start of the current fluctuation display, that is, from the previous read-ahead process to the current pre-read process, are read ahead. You may comprise so that determination may be performed. Even in such a configuration, when it is determined that the big hit or the small win, it may be configured not to perform the pre-reading process for the subsequent start winning.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided.

  (14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, (Sound / lamp board having the functions of the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) An effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect display device 9 and the decorative design indicators 9a and 9b are changed. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control to control. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (15) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command by the effect display device 9 as an effect part. Since it is configured to execute the corresponding notice effect, two special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 8A or second special symbol indicator 8Ba, first special symbol indicator 8A or second special symbol) Even if the display device 8Bb) is provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game (such as which variation display means is performing an effect corresponding to the variation display), You can enrich the game variations.

  (16) In each of the above-described embodiments, a display composed of two LEDs is used as a decorative symbol display. However, the decorative symbol display is not limited to such a configuration. For example, you may comprise one or more 7 segment LED. In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not provided with a decorative symbol display.

  (17) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Further, the above-described embodiment can also be applied to a game machine in which one type and two types are mixed. The gaming machine in which one type and two types are mixed may be a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

A game is played by driving a game ball into the game area. The first state is advantageous for a player who easily accepts a game ball, and the second disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to accept a game ball than the first state. A variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) that changes into a state and a plurality of types based on the establishment of the variable display start condition after the game ball enters the start area (start port) provided in the game area. A variation display unit for deriving and displaying a display result after variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information in any of the variation display patterns, and a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived in the variation display unit Sometimes the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled from the second state to the first state in a predetermined starting mode, and a game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus has entered a specific entry area (so-called V zone). Especially And controlling to a specific gaming state (so-called jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, and when a specific display result (jackpot symbol) is derived in the variable display section, without depending on the entry of the game ball into the specific entry area A gaming machine that controls the specific gaming state (direct hit big hit),
The plurality of types of variable display patterns are obtained by temporarily suspending the variable display of all the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable information is displayed. It includes a re-variable display pattern (pseudo-variable variation pattern) that executes re-variable display that resumes the variable display of all identification information later, and the re-variable display pattern is a non-specific display of the identification information display result. A higher percentage is executed when the specific display result is obtained than when the result is obtained,
When a game ball enters the start area but the variable display start condition is not satisfied, whether or not to control to the specific game state and the variable winning ball device from the second state in a predetermined start mode A storage unit for storing information for specifying whether to control to the first state and information for specifying a variable display pattern to be executed as storage information within a predetermined upper limit number;
When the variable display start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the plurality of types of identification information is started based on the hold storage information stored at the earliest time among the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means. Variation display control execution means for performing variation display control for deriving and displaying a display result after
When the re-variable display pattern information indicating the re-variable display pattern is stored as the reserved storage information in the reserved storage means, the re-variable display pattern is set before the variable display start condition is established based on the reserved storage information. A gaming machine comprising a notice effect executing means for notifying the execution of variable display control by a predetermined notice effect mode.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, in the pre-reading process, the direct hit big hit determination, the small hit determination, and the variation pattern type determination are performed at the time of starting winning, and the process for executing the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading determination result is performed. It may be configured.

  In the above gaming machine, start mode determining means for determining the start mode of the variable winning ball device (number of times of opening of an accessory, bonus release time, bonus release timing, etc.) among a plurality of startup modes. In the case of having so-called release mode determination), it may be configured such that the release mode determination is further performed at the time of starting winning in the pre-reading process, and the process for executing the pre-reading notice effect is performed based on the pre-reading determination result.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 is changed corresponding to the special symbol has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect pattern displayed on the effect display device 9 is changed in correspondence with the normal symbol, and the change pattern corresponding to the above-described pseudo-series is included in the change pattern until the display result is derived. You may comprise. In this case, the variable display execution condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the gate 32. The variable display start condition is satisfied when the second symbol winning opening 14 is not open (during normal symbol hitting) and the normal symbol variation display due to the reserved memory that has passed through the gate first ends. When configured in this way, for example, when a game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a in the prefetching process, the hit judgment and the variation pattern type judgment are performed, and the prefetching notice effect is executed based on the prefetching judgment result. You may comprise so that the process for doing may be performed.

  (19) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by executing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (20) As described above, in the special symbol process, when the start port switch passing process is divided into the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, for example, a pre-read process or a big hit determination is performed. Some processes such as processes may be shared by executing a common processing routine.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are configured by the same type of display (7-segment LED) has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured by different types of displays. Specifically, one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be a seven-segment display and the other may be a dot matrix display. One of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a 7-segment display, and the other is composed of an LED display such as the decorative symbol display 9a, 9b. May be.

  (22) In the embodiment described above, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, not limited to this, the normal symbol display 10 is not provided, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32, the display variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. Good.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to execute a pseudo-ream, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to execute a pseudo-ream. Is received, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  (24) As the above-mentioned notice effect, the explanation effect using the image has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the notice effect using only the sound, the notice effect using only the movable member, the image and the sound The notice effect using the image, the sound and the movable member, the notice effect using the image and the moving member, and the notice effect using the image, the sound and the movable member. The pattern may be used. Further, the notice effect may be selected and executed from among these notice patterns in a predetermined order, or may be selected and executed at random from these notice patterns.

  (25) With regard to sudden probability change (surprise accuracy), such as when a big hit is not made in a pseudo-ream, a design that is once out of reach is displayed in a state that does not become reach, and then an effect that suddenly hits the probability change (surprise accuracy) is performed. It may be.

  (26) The above-described chance may be displayed when the result of a sudden big hit is displayed, or may be displayed regardless of whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit.

  (27) As for the above-mentioned notice type, when the notice effect is executed at the same time, the notice effects whose effects are overlapped are grouped on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and only one of the notice effects that overlap each other is selected. This is to prevent inconvenience that the productions are duplicated on the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the announcement effect is executed at the same time, it may be simply grouped as the type of the announcement, regardless of whether or not the effect overlaps on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  (28) The pre-reading notice effect in the above-described embodiment has been described with respect to an example in which the pre-reading notice effect is executed over a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in the hold storage to be notified and the variable display executed before the hold storage. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing, for example, in a variable display executed prior to the reserved storage to be notified.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined conditions for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect by the notice prohibition means (S218a and S229a in FIG. 17 or S218b and S229b in FIG. 71 or S218c in FIG. 72) are high base, low It was established based on the base, high probability, low probability, etc., and control was made to switch the reserved memory for which the pre-reading notice is to be made. A predetermined condition may be established under various conditions such as whether or not the probability has changed (probability) or whether or not the number of times of fluctuation has become a predetermined number of times, and the hold storage that is the target of the prefetch notice may be switched.

  (30) In the above embodiment, when the prefetch big hit flag or the prefetch small hit flag is set in S218 or S229, the game control microcomputer 560 does not execute the prefetch processing (S219, S230). However, instead of this, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the prefetch processing of S219 and S230, but the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform control so that the prefetch advance notice is not executed.

  (31) The random R shown in FIG. 7 may also be used as the random 2-1, and with the extracted value of the random R, the determination of the big hit or the small hit and the determination of the big hit type may be performed. In this way, it is possible not only to determine whether or not to win based on the extracted value of the random R, but also to determine the type of hit (whether or not it is a probable variation), and in performing the pre-reading notice, the change of the pre-read target Predict whether the start time is probabilistic or non-probable (normal), and whether or not the look-ahead target is non-probable (normal) This enables accurate prediction effects.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, the special condition for probability change is that a predetermined symbol (probability variation symbol) in which probability variation occurs among the symbols in which jackpot is generated is confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot is generated. It is established by termination and becomes a probable change, but is not limited to this. For example, if a big hit occurs once, it may be provided with a limiter that will surely generate a probable change three times (a probability change that continues until the big hit occurs three times). . The special condition that becomes a certain change in the case with the limiter is satisfied when a big hit occurs and the big hit ends regardless of the type of the fixed stop symbol.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is provided, and the second starting winning port ( 2nd start opening) 14 was comprised. But not limited to that. A variable winning ball device 15 is provided at a position slightly above the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 so that the game ball that has passed through the variable winning ball device 15 falls downward, and the second start is performed at the dropping position. A winning opening (second starting port) 14 may be provided. Further, not only the variable winning ball device 15 but also the first state in which the game ball does not enter or hardly enter the second start winning port (second starting port) 14 and the game ball is the second starting winning port (second starting port). Any device can be used as long as the device can change to the second state in which it can easily enter 14, for example, an obstacle member such as an obstacle nail that opens and closes.

(34) In the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines are disclosed.
When a variable display device (effect display device 9) is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be distinguished from each other and deriving and displaying a display result, and the display result is a specific display result (big hit symbol) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that shifts to a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous for a player,
Numerical data updating means (random number circuit 503, random R in FIG. 7) for updating numerical data used for determining whether to control to the specific gaming state within a predetermined numerical range;
Detection means (first start port switch 13a, second start port switch 14a) for detecting that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Information acquisition means (S215, S226) for acquiring numerical data from the numerical data update means as starting information when a game medium is detected by the detection means;
Reservation storage means (first reservation storage buffer and second reservation storage buffer, S215, S226 in FIG. 19) for storing the start information acquired by the information acquisition means;
When starting the variable display of the identification information based on the start information stored on hold, if the start information matches the specific determination data (big hit determination value), it is determined to control to the specific gaming state Pre-determining means (S61),
Regarding the variable display of the identification information based on the one start information stored on hold, until the display result of the variable display based on the start information stored on hold before the one start information is derived and displayed The starting information is held and stored by the holding storage means, and after the display result is derived and displayed, variable display of the identification information based on the starting information of the one is started, and the prior determination of the starting information of the one Variable display control means (S215, S226, S52 to S55, S61 to S76, S91 to S109, S110 to S120, S801 to S803) for executing variable display control for deriving and displaying the display result based on the determination of the means;
Acquisition time determination means (S219, S230) for determining whether or not the start information matches the specific determination data when the start information is acquired by the information acquisition means;
When the identification information is variably displayed based on the start information stored on hold before the start information determined by the acquisition time determination means, the game machine is based on the determination result of the acquisition time determination means. Notice effect execution means (S675 to S680 in FIG. 54, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 65) for executing the notice effect using the provided effect device;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, the gaming state control means controls the special gaming state with a high probability that the prior deciding means decides to control to the specific gaming state as compared to the normal state. (S133, S134, S139 to S142, S158, S161 to S163).

(35) Based on the fact that the game is played by driving the game medium into the game area (game area 7) where the game medium can flow down, and the game medium passes through the first start area (first start winning award 13). The first variable display means (first special symbol display device 8a, effect display device 9) for performing the variable display of the identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result, and the game medium are in the first start area (first display). 2nd variable display means (second special symbol display device 9a, effect display device 9) that performs variable display of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that it has passed through the 2 start winning opening 14) and derives and displays the display result. ), And when the display result derived and displayed on the first or second variable display means becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), the game state is determined to be a specific game state advantageous to the player ( Big hit) A gaming machine (Pachinko machine 1)
Information (value extracted from random R, hit determination result) for specifying whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the gaming medium passes through the first starting area is within a predetermined upper limit number range. First hold storage means (S215 in FIG. 17) that can be stored as hold storage information at
Information (value extracted from random R, hit determination result) for specifying whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the gaming medium passes through the second starting area is within a predetermined upper limit number range. And second hold storage means (S226 in FIG. 17) that can be stored as hold storage information.
Based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means when the specific game state is not controlled and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the first variable display means When the variable display of the first variable display means is executed, the control state is not controlled to the specific gaming state, and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the second variable display means, the second reserved storage Variable display control execution means (S300 to S304 in FIG. 16, S800 to S803 in FIG. 58) for executing variable display of the second variable display means based on the stored storage information stored in the means;
In the variable display for deriving and displaying the display result before starting the variable display based on the hold storage information when the hold storage information indicating the control to the specific gaming state is stored in the first hold storage means The hold storage information indicating that the display result based on the hold storage information is informed that the display result becomes the specific display result is executed and the control is performed in the specific game state is stored in the second hold storage means. In the variable display for deriving and displaying the display result before the start of the variable display based on the hold storage information, a notice effect is performed to notify that the display result based on the hold storage information becomes the specific display result. Notice effect executing means (S675 to S685 in FIGS. 57 and 63, FIGS. 64, 65 and 68),
The notice prohibition means (S218a in FIG. 17) prohibits execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the hold storage information stored in one of the first and second hold storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. S229a or S218b of FIG. 71 and S229b or S218c of FIG. 72).

  According to such a configuration, execution of the pre-reading notice effect by the notice effect executing means based on the hold storage information stored in one of the first and second hold memories is prohibited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player is less interested in the current variable display as compared to the case where the pre-reading notice effect is always executed based on the hold storage accompanying the passage of the game medium to both the first start area and the second start area. In addition to preventing inconveniences, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of excessive gambling by pre-reading a plurality of specific gaming states occurring in the reserved memory, and the player's interest in the notice effect and the player's interest in the current variable display You can keep a good balance with your interests and enjoy a well-rounded game.

(36) Special gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state (probability change) that is likely to result in the specific display result compared to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition (FIG. 8 (A), S61). , S71, S158, S161, S162),
The advance notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the advance notice effect by the advance notice effect executing means based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means in the special gaming state, and the second hold memory in the normal gaming state. The execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the stored storage information stored in the means is prohibited (S218b and S229b in FIG. 71 as the establishment of a predetermined condition for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect).

  According to such a configuration, the number of variable display units corresponding to the stored information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect does not change in any of the special game state and the normal game state. And the player's interest in the current variable display can be distributed in a balanced manner.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the same data as the reserved specific area shown in FIG. 19A is stored in the RAM of the production control microcomputer 100, and the pre-reading notice is made using the data. It is determined whether or not to perform (S663 and S664), whether or not to select the first pseudo-continuous pattern (S1551), and whether or not to end the prefetching notice (S684). However, the determination is not limited to the determination using the stored data in the reserved specific area, but based on the first start prize counter and the second start prize designation command for counting the first start prize based on the first start prize designation command. And a second start winning counter that counts the second starting win, and subtracts the value of the counter preferentially from the second start winning counter when subtracting the counter value based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. In this manner, the determinations of S664, S1551, and S684 may be performed using the values of both counters.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  9 effect display device, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 560 microcomputer for game control, 100 microcomputer for effect control.

Claims (1)

The game is played by driving the game medium into a game area where the game medium can flow down, and the display result is obtained by executing variable display of identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed the first starting area. First variable display means for deriving and displaying, and second variable display means for deriving and displaying a display result by executing variable display of identification information each identifiable based on the fact that the game medium has passed the second starting area A gaming machine that controls the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result derived and displayed on the first or second variable display means is a predetermined specific display result. And
First hold memory capable of storing information for specifying whether or not to control to the specific game state when the game medium passes through the first starting area as hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit number Means,
Second hold memory capable of storing information for specifying whether or not to control to the specific game state when the game medium passes through the second start area as hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit number Means, and
Based on the hold storage information stored in the first hold storage means when the specific game state is not controlled and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the first variable display means When the variable display of the first variable display means is executed, the control state is not controlled to the specific gaming state, and the variable display of the identification information is not executed in the second variable display means, the second reserved storage Variable display control execution means for executing variable display of the second variable display means based on the on-hold storage information stored in the means;
Special gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more likely to result in the specific display than the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the special condition;
When on-hold storage information indicating that control is to be performed in the specific gaming state is stored in the first on-hold storage means, a display result based on the on-hold storage information is displayed before the start of variable display based on the on-hold storage information. Based on the reserved storage information when the reserved storage information indicating that the specific display result is to be executed and the control to the specific gaming state is performed is stored in the second reserved storage means Prior to the start of variable display, a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect for notifying that a display result based on the hold storage information becomes the specific display result;
In the special game state, execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the hold memory information stored in the first hold memory means is prohibited, and in the normal game state, the notice effect is stored in the second hold memory means. A gaming machine comprising: a notice prohibition unit that prohibits execution of the notice effect by the notice effect execution means based on the stored storage information.

Images